JP2019058314A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a technique capable of reducing a processing load and a program volume.SOLUTION: In a time shortening state, a ball entrance to a variable start winning device 28 is caused by a right-side shooting and thereby a second special symbol is variably displayed and stop displayed. If the second special symbol varies four (4) times in the time shortening state, the time shortening state is terminated but after the termination of the time shortening, the second special symbol can vary within a range of a number of operation storage (maximum 4 pieces). During this time, if a small win is won in a lottery and if a ball entrance to a second big winning port is achieved, a big win occurs, which is caused by a ball passing of a specific area. At this time, if a variation pattern of the second special symbol is a combination of a specific first half variation pattern and a specific second half variation patter, a number of times of variation after the time shortening is configured not to become more than four (4) times by differently setting a settlement time.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 68

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine that executes variable display and stop display of symbols.

  Conventionally, with regard to this type of gaming machine, there are normal stop display time and extended stop display time as stop display time after fluctuating display of symbols, and setting of stop display time according to kind of non winning and type of fluctuation pattern Prior art which makes different is known (for example, refer patent document 1).

Patent No. 5687844

As in the above-described prior art, when the type of the variation pattern is determined and the setting of the stop display time is made different, it is considered that the determination can be easily performed as the configuration of the variation pattern is simple.
However, as the configuration of the fluctuation pattern becomes more complicated, the more complicated judgment is required on the control program, and the processing load and program capacity for setting the stop display time increase.

  Therefore, the present invention provides a technique capable of reducing processing load and program capacity.

  The present invention adopts the following solutions in order to solve the problems described above. In addition, the wording in the following parenthesis is an illustration to the last, and this invention is not limited to this. Further, the present invention can be an invention including at least one of the invention specific matters shown in the following solution means. Furthermore, to each invention specific item shown in the following solution means, an element which limits the invention specific item can be added and subconceptified, and an element which limits the invention specific item can be deleted and superordinated. .

  Solution means 1: A game machine according to this solution means is a symbol display means for executing variable display and stop display of symbols, and a fluctuation pattern determination means for determining a fluctuation pattern required for the fluctuation display by combining a plurality of components. And a determined time determining means for determining a determined time required for the stop display based on a component of the part of the fluctuation pattern.

  According to this solution, the fluctuation pattern is not a simple configuration (for example, a configuration determined by a unique number or the like), but is configured by combining a plurality of components. It is possible to realize (representation mode during variable display), and to widen the range of the game property to provide interest. On the other hand, since the configuration of the variation pattern is complicated, the process for determining the variation pattern in control is also complicated, and the variation pattern finally determined can not be identified by only a simple number or the like. ing.

  In such a situation, an attempt is made to make a different setting according to the variation pattern determined at that time (for example, the time for determining the lottery result etc. in the form of the symbol displayed for a stop). Then, a control procedure is required to determine the configuration of the fluctuation pattern in detail, and the program capacity also increases accordingly.

  For this reason, in the present solution means, when the variation pattern is configured by a combination of a plurality of components, it is not necessary to make a detailed judgment on all the components in detail, and the determination time is determined based on some components. It is supposed to be done. Normally, as the number of combinations of a plurality of components increases, the procedure for determining each component becomes necessary, and the processing load and program capacity increase. Since it is determined that only the constituent elements of the unit need be determined, the processing load does not increase carelessly, and the increase in program capacity can be suppressed.

  Solution 2: The gaming machine according to the solution includes, in the solution described above, element defining means for defining a first half fluctuation pattern and a second half fluctuation pattern as a plurality of constituent elements, and the first half fluctuation pattern in determining the fluctuation pattern. Means for defining a first half fluctuation pattern table defining the first half fluctuation pattern table selectable from among a plurality of pieces, and selection of a second half fluctuation pattern from among a plurality of second half fluctuation patterns according to the first half fluctuation pattern selected upon determination of the fluctuation pattern And a second half variation pattern table defining means for defining a second half variation pattern table, wherein the variation pattern determination means selects a particular first half variation pattern, and selects the variation pattern by a combination of selecting a particular second half variation pattern. If it is possible to decide, and select a specific first half fluctuation pattern In addition, when the variation pattern can be determined by a combination in which a non-specific second-half variation pattern is selected, and when the non-specific first-half variation pattern is selected and the non-specific second-half variation pattern is selected, the variation pattern In some cases, it is possible to determine the determination time, and the determination time determination means determines the determination time based on whether the combination of the variation patterns has a specific late variation pattern or a non-specific late variation pattern.

According to this solution, the following features are added.
(1) The variation pattern is composed of a combination of the “first half variation pattern” and the “second half variation pattern”, and a plurality of “first half variation patterns” and “second half variation patterns” are defined.
(2) What can be selected as the "first half fluctuation pattern" and the "second half fluctuation pattern" are respectively defined in the "first half fluctuation pattern table" and the "second half fluctuation pattern table", and among them, the "first half fluctuation pattern table" The first half variation pattern is selected.
(3) When the “first half fluctuation pattern” is selected in the above (2), the “second half fluctuation pattern” selectable according to the result is defined by the “second half fluctuation pattern table”.
(4) For this reason, the selection of the “second-half fluctuation pattern” is linked to the selection of the “first-half fluctuation pattern” to some extent, and the selectable combination modes are roughly divided into the following.
(I) A combination of a specific first half fluctuation pattern + a specific second half fluctuation pattern, or
(Ii) combination of specific first half fluctuation pattern + non-specific second half fluctuation pattern, or
(Iii) A combination of non-specific first half fluctuation pattern + non-specific second half fluctuation pattern. At this time, a combination of non-specific first half fluctuation pattern + specific second half fluctuation pattern is not selected.
(5) As described above, although the above (i) to (iii) can be selected as the combination aspect of the components of the fluctuation pattern to be finally determined, focusing on the “second half fluctuation pattern” part, Although (i) is configured by combining “specific second-half fluctuation patterns”, the other (ii) and (iii) described above are configured by combining “non-specific second-half fluctuation patterns” I understand.
Therefore, in the present solution means, it is judged whether the combination of variation patterns has a specific second half variation pattern or a non-specific second half variation pattern, which one of the above (i) and other combinations is optimal. The decision time can be determined.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, processing load and program capacity can be reduced.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view showing a game board unit alone. It is a figure which shows the detail of the 2nd variable winning prize apparatus 31. FIG. It is a figure which shows the detail of the 2nd variable winning prize apparatus 31. FIG. It is a front view which expands and shows a part of game board unit. It is a block diagram showing various electronic equipment with which a pachinko machine was equipped. It is a flowchart (1/2) which shows the example of a procedure of a reset start process. It is a flowchart (2/2) which shows the example of a procedure of a reset start process. It is a flowchart which shows concretely the procedure example of a power-off occurrence check process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an interruption management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of switch input event processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of 1st special symbol memory | storage update processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of 2nd special symbol memory | storage update processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the effect determination processing at the time of acquisition. It is a flow chart which shows the example of composition of special symbol game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of special symbol variation pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a special symbol storage area shift process. It is a figure which shows the structure row of a 1st special symbol big hit time stop symbol selection table. It is a figure which shows the structure row of a 2nd special symbol big hit time stop symbol selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of a 2nd special symbol small hit time stop symbol selection table. It is a flow chart which shows an example of procedure of out-of-time variation pattern determination processing. A 1st special symbol is a figure showing an example of composition of selection table offset value selection table according to operation memory number before shift at the time of shift. It is the figure which showed the feature (category) of the reach group selection table selected according to the value of the reach group selection offset. It is a figure which shows one structural example of a reach group selection table at the time of a loss. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the reach mode selection table at the time of symbol distinction. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a 1st special symbol second half variation pattern selection table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a 2nd special symbol second half variation pattern selection table. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the stop display determination time determination process used by this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the stop display fixed time determination process mentioned as a comparative example. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a procedure of processing under special symbol stop indication. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a display output management process. It is a flow chart which shows the example of composition of variable winning a prize device management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a big winning opening opening pattern setting process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a procedure of big hit time special winning opening opening pattern setting processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the open pattern setting table according to big hit at the time of big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of small hit time big prize mouth opening pattern setting processing. It is a figure which shows an example of a small hit opening pattern setting table. It is a flow chart which shows the example of a procedure of big winning a prize mouth opening and closing operation processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a procedure of the 2nd big winning a prize mouth opening and closing operation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of specific area opening / closing operation processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of procedure of processing at the time of specific field passage. It is a figure which shows an example of the open pattern setting table according to a design at the time of specific area passage. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a procedure of the 1st big winning a prize opening opening and closing operation processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a procedure of big winning a prize mouth closing processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of completion | finish processing. It is a figure explaining the game flow expand | deployed when the 1st special symbol changes in normal mode. It is a figure explaining the game flow expand | deployed when the 2nd special symbol changes in normal mode. It is a figure explaining the game flow expand | deployed when the 1st special symbol changes in drive mode. It is a figure explaining the game flow expand | deployed when the 2nd special symbol changes in drive mode. It is a continuous view showing an example of an effect image made to correspond to change display and stop display of a special symbol (1/2). It is a continuous view showing an example of an effect image made to correspond to change display and stop display of a special symbol (2/2). It is a continuous figure showing the flow of the reach production performed at the time of big hit (1/3). It is a continuous figure showing the flow of the reach production performed at the time of big hit (2/3). It is a continuous figure showing the flow of the reach production performed at the time of big hit (3/3). FIG. 16 is a continuous view partially showing an example of a special effect during a big hit game (1/4). FIG. 18 is a continuous view partially showing an example of a special effect during a big hit game (2/4). FIG. 17 is a continuous view partially showing an example of a big playing effect execution performed during a big hit game (3/4). FIG. 18 is a continuous view partially showing an example of a special effect during a big hit game (4/4). It is a continuous diagram showing an example of presentation of drive mode (1/3). It is a continuous diagram showing an example of presentation of drive mode (2/3). It is a continuous diagram showing an example of presentation of drive mode (3/3). It is a continuous figure showing an example of an effect at the time of the 2nd special symbol changing in drive mode in a non-time shortening state (1/2). It is a continuous diagram showing an example of an effect at the time of the 2nd special symbol fluctuating in a drive mode in a non-time shortening state (2/2). It is a continuous diagram showing an example of an effect performed when special change is chosen in drive mode (1/3). It is a continuous diagram showing an example of an effect performed when special change is chosen in drive mode (2/3). It is a continuous diagram showing an example of an effect performed when special change is chosen in drive mode (3/3). FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of transition of the gaming state when the special determination time is set at the time of the symbol stop display of the final variation during the time saving. It is a continuous figure showing an example of a production in a connected zone performed in an operation memory number of the 2nd special symbol after an end of a time shortening state. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an effect control process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an operation memory production management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of production | presentation symbol management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a production | design pattern fluctuation | variation pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a big hit time change production pattern selection process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of procedure of out-of-time variation production pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of processing under production | presentation symbol stop display. It is a flow chart which shows the example of a procedure of processing at the time of variable winning a prize device operation. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an effect process during time short and during pseudo | simulated time short. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a drum unit production management process.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter abbreviated as “pachinko machine”) 1. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 uses a game ball as a game medium, and the player borrows the game ball from the game arcade operator to play a game with the pachinko machine 1. In the game in the pachinko machine 1, the game ball is a medium in which each one has a game value, and the benefits (profits) that the player enjoys as a result of the game are, for example, the game that the player has won The game value can be converted based on the number of balls. Hereinafter, the entire configuration of the gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2.

[Overall configuration of gaming machine]
The pachinko machine 1 mainly includes an outer frame unit 2, an integral door unit 4 and an inner frame assembly 7 (plastic frame, gaming machine frame) as its main body. The integral door unit 4 is located at the front of the player when viewed from the front facing the player. The inner frame assembly 7 is located on the back side (rear side) of the integral door unit 4, and the outer frame unit 2 is disposed so as to surround the outer side of the inner frame assembly 7.

  The outer frame unit 2 is a structure in which a wood and a metal material are combined in a vertically long rectangular shape, and the outer frame unit 2 is a fastener such as a screw for island equipment (not shown) in the game arcade. It is fixed by using. In the vertically-rectangular outer frame unit 2, wood is used for portions corresponding to upper and lower short sides, and metal materials are used for portions corresponding to left and right long sides.

  The integral door unit 4 has a structure in which the saucer unit 6 is integrated at the lower position thereof. The integral door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are attached to the island facility via the outer frame unit 2, and they operate in an open / close manner via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The opening / closing axis of the hinge mechanism (not shown) extends vertically along the left end as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1.

  A uniform lock unit 9 is provided inside the right side edge (the left side edge in FIG. 2) of the inner frame assembly 7 when viewed from the front in FIG. Moreover, the locking tool which is not shown in figure is provided also in the right side edge part (back side) of the integral door unit 4 and the outer frame unit 2 corresponding to this, respectively. As shown in FIG. 1, in a state where the integral door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are closed with respect to the outer frame unit 2, the united lock unit 9 on the back side thereof is combined with the lock and the integral door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly. 7 is not open.

  Further, at the right side edge of the tray unit 6, a cylinder lock 6a with a keyhole is provided. For example, when the manager of the game arcade inserts the dedicated key into the keyhole and twists the cylinder lock 6a clockwise, the uniform lock unit 9 operates to allow the integral door unit 4 to be opened together with the inner frame assembly 7. . When the whole of them is opened from the outer frame unit 2 to the front side (moving like a door), the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed on the front side.

  On the other hand, when the cylinder lock 6a is twisted counterclockwise, only the locking of the integral door unit 4 is released while the inner frame assembly 7 is locked, and the integral door unit 4 can be opened. When the integral door unit 4 is opened to the front side, the game board unit 8 is exposed directly, and in this state, the manager of the game arcade can remove obstacles such as ball clogging in the board. Further, when the integral door unit 4 is opened, the saucer unit 6 is also opened to the front side together.

  Further, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with the above-mentioned gaming board unit 8 as a gaming unit. The game board unit 8 is supported by the above-described inner frame assembly 7 behind (inside) the integral door unit 4. The game board unit 8 is removable with respect to the inner frame assembly 7, for example, in a state where the integral door unit 4 is opened to the front side. In the integral door unit 4, a vertically elongated circular window 4 a is formed at the central portion, and a glass unit (without reference numeral) is attached in the window 4 a. The glass unit is, for example, a combination of two transparent plates (glass plates) cut in accordance with the shape of the window 4a. The glass unit is attached to the back side of the integral door unit 4 via an attachment (not shown). A game area 8a (board) is formed on the front of the game board unit 8, and the game area 8a is visible to the player from the front side through the window 4a. When the integral door unit 4 is closed, a space where the gaming balls can flow down is formed between the inner surface of the glass unit and the board.

  The saucer unit 6 generally has a shape protruding from the integral door unit 4 to the front side, and the upper plate 6b is formed on the upper surface thereof. In the upper tray 6b, a game ball (rental ball) lent to the player and a game ball (prize ball) acquired by winning can be stored. In the tray unit 6, a lower tray 6c is formed at a lower position of the upper tray 6b. In the lower plate 6c, gaming balls that are further paid out when the upper plate 6b is full are stored. The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is a so-called CR machine (type connected to a CR unit), and the gaming balls borrowed by the player are separated from the payout device unit 172 on the back side separately from the winning balls. Disbursed to the plate 6b or the lower plate 6c).

  A lending operation unit 14 is provided on the upper surface of the tray unit 6, and a ball lending button 10 and a return button 12 are disposed in the lending operation unit 14. When the player operates the ball lending button 10 in a state where a valuable medium (for example, a magnetic recording medium, a medium with a storage IC, etc.) is inserted into a CR unit (not shown), the number corresponding to a predetermined frequency unit (for example, 5 degrees) The game balls of (for example, 125 pieces) are lent out. Therefore, a frequency display unit (not shown) is disposed on the upper surface of the lending operation unit 14, and the frequency display unit displays the remaining frequency of the valuable medium inserted in the CR unit. Incidentally, the player can receive the return of the valuable medium in which the frequency remains by operating the return button 12. Although the CR machine is described as an example in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 may be a cash machine (a type not connected to the CR unit) other than the CR machine.

  Further, on the upper surface of the tray unit 6, an upper disc ball release button 6d is installed in front of the upper disc 6b in the upper position, and a lower disc ball out lever 6e in the central part in front of the lower disc 6c. Is installed. The player can cause the gaming balls stored in the upper tray 6b to flow down to the lower tray 6c by, for example, pressing the upper tray sphere removing button 6d. In addition, the player can drop the gaming ball stored in the lower tray 6c downward and discharge it by sliding the lower bowl pulling lever 6e, for example, in the left direction. The game balls discharged are received by, for example, a ball receiving box not shown.

  A grip unit 16 is installed at the lower right portion of the tray unit 6. The player operates the grip unit 16 to operate the firing control board set 174, and can shoot (strike) the game ball toward the game area 8a (ball launcher). The fired game balls rise from the lower edge of the game board unit 8 along the left edge and are guided by the outer band (not shown) and thrown into the game area 8a. A large number of obstacle nails and a windmill (without reference numeral in the figure) are arranged in the game area 8a, and the thrown game ball flows down in the game area 8a while being guided and guided by the obstacle nail and the windmill. The configuration of the game area 8a (board) will be described later with reference to another drawing.

[Composition of frame front]
In the integral door unit 4, a left top lens unit 47 and an upper right illumination unit 49 are installed as components for effect. Among them, the glass frame top lamp 46 and the glass frame decoration lamp 48 on the left side are incorporated in the left top lens unit 47, and the glass frame decoration lamp 50 on the right side is incorporated in the upper right illumination unit 49. In addition, left and right glass frame decoration lamps 52 are installed on the integral door unit 4 so as to be continuous with the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49 respectively, and these glass frame decoration lamps 52 It extends from the left and right edges of the integral door unit 4 to the front of the saucer unit 6. In the integral door unit 4, the glass frame top lamp 46 and the left and right glass frame decoration lamps 48, 50, 52, etc. are arranged so as to surround the glass unit (without reference numeral).

  The various lamps 46, 48, 50, 52 described above execute effects by, for example, light emission (lighting or blinking, change in luminance gradation, change in color tone, etc.) of the built-in LED. In the upper part of the integral door unit 4, speakers 54 and 55 on the glass frame are respectively incorporated in the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49. On the other hand, an outer frame speaker 56 is incorporated at the lower left position of the outer frame unit 2. These speakers 54, 55, 56 are to output effects sound, BGM, voice and the like (general sound) to execute effects.

  Further, at the center of the tray unit 6, a presentation switching button 45 (operation input accepting means) is installed at a position in front of the upper tray 6b. The effect switching button 45 has, for example, a form in which a push-in circular button and a rotary jog ring (jog dial) around it are combined. The player switches the effect contents (for example, the background screen displayed on the liquid crystal display 42) by pushing or rotating this effect switching button 45, or, for example, performs some effect (during symbol variation or during a big hit game) It is possible to generate a notice effect, a definite change promotion effect, a promotion effect during a major role, etc.).

[Configuration on the back side]
As shown in FIG. 2, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the power control unit 162, the main control board unit 170, the dispensing unit 172, the flow path unit 173, the launch control board set 174, the dispensing control board unit 176. , The back cover unit 178 and the like are installed. Besides, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, various electronic devices (including a control computer not shown) constituting the power system and control system of the pachinko machine 1, an external terminal board 160, a power cord (power plug) 164, A ground wire (ground terminal) 166, connection wiring (not shown) and the like are provided. The electronic devices will be further described later based on another block diagram (FIG. 7).

  The above-described dispenser unit 172 has, for example, a winning ball tank 172a and a winning ball case (without a reference numeral). Among the above, the winning ball tank 172a is installed at the upper edge (back side) of the inner frame assembly 7. In the state, it is possible to store gaming balls supplied from a supply route (not shown). The game balls stored in the prize ball tank 172a are guided to the prize ball case through the upper prize ball basket (not shown). The flow path unit 173 guides the gaming balls sent from the payout device unit 172 toward the saucer unit 6 on the front side.

  Further, the external terminal board 160 is for connecting the pachinko machine 1 to an external electronic device (for example, a data display device, a hall computer, etc.). From the external terminal board 160, the game of the pachinko machine 1 is performed. Various external information signals (for example, winning ball information, door opening information, symbol determination frequency information, big hit information, starting opening information, etc.) indicating the progress status, maintenance status, etc. will be output to the external electronic device ing.

  The power supply cord 164 is to be connected to a power supply device (for example, AC 24 V) installed at an island facility of the game arcade, for example, to secure the power supply (power) necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 1. Further, the ground wire 166 is connected to a ground terminal similarly installed in the island facility to secure the ground (ground) of the pachinko machine 1.

[Composition of board]
FIG. 3 is a front view showing the gaming board unit 8 alone. In the game area 8a, a relatively large effect unit 40 is disposed at the center position of the game area 8a. The game area 8a is largely divided into a left portion, a right portion and a lower portion around the effect unit 40. In the game area 8a, the middle start winning opening 26, the start gate 20, the normal winning openings 22 and 25, the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device around the effect unit 40. 31 mag is distributed and installed. Among them, the start winning opening 26 is located at the center of the lower part of the game area 8a. On the right side of the game area 8a (so-called right-handed area), the start gate 20, the normal winning opening 25, the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31 are arranged in this order from the top It is done.

  The game ball thrown into the game area 8a passes through the start gate 20 in the process of flowing down, enters the middle start winning opening 26, the normal winning openings 22 and 25 (wins), or opens the game The variable start winning device 28 at the time, the first variable winning device 30 at the opening operation, and the second variable winning device 31 at the opening operation are entered. Here, the game ball flowing down the left side area of the game area 8 a may enter the middle start winning opening 26 or the normal winning opening 22. The game ball flowing down the right side area of the game area 8a passes through the start gate 20, enters the normal winning opening 25, enters the variable start winning device 28 at the time of opening operation, at the time of opening operation There is a possibility of entering the first variable winning device 30 or entering the second variable winning device 31 during the opening operation. The game balls that enter the middle start winning opening 26, the normal winning openings 22 and 25, the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31 are the game boards (the game board unit 8 It is collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through a through hole formed in a plate, a transparent plate or the like.

  In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned variable start winning device 28 operates when the predetermined operating condition is satisfied (when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a hitting manner), and accordingly, to the right starting winning opening 28b Enable entry of the ball (normally a motorized role). The variable start winning device 28 has, for example, a pair of left and right opening and closing members 28a, and the opening and closing members 28a reciprocate in the left and right direction along the board by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown). That is, as shown in FIG. 3, the left and right opening and closing members 28a are in the closed position with their tips facing upward, and it is difficult to enter the right start winning opening 28b at this time (the game ball enters the ball) There is no gap that can be made). On the other hand, when the variable start winning device 28 operates, the left and right opening and closing members 28a are respectively displaced (expanded) from the closed position toward the open position, and the opening width is expanded left and right to open the right start winning opening 28b. During this time, the variable start winning device 28 becomes capable of entering the game ball, and can enter the right start winning opening 28b (variable start winning means). At this time, the opening and closing member 28a also functions as a member for guiding the game ball into the right start winning opening 28b. In addition, the arrangement of the obstacle nails installed in the game board unit 8 basically does not extremely inhibit the flow of the game ball toward the variable start winning device 28 (right start winning opening 28b when opened). However, the game ball does not necessarily enter the variable starting winning device 28 (right starting winning opening 28b) at the time of the opening operation, and the entering ball occurs at random. The variable start winning device 28 opens, for example, for 0.1 second in the non-time-shortened state, and opens for 0.9 seconds in the time-reduced state (may be other number of seconds).

  The first variable winning device 30 operates when the prescribed condition is satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a big hit mode, or when the gaming ball passes a specific area during a small hit game) , Enables entry to the first big winning opening 30b (special electric winning combination, special winning event occurrence means). The first variable winning device 30 has, for example, one opening and closing member 30a. The open / close member 30a is displaced from the closed position toward the open position by the action of a link mechanism using, for example, a solenoid (not shown). The open / close member 30a is in the closed position (closed state) with the tip facing upward as shown, and it is difficult at this time to enter the first large winning opening 30b (the first large winning opening 30b is closed) It is. When the first variable winning device 30 operates, the opening / closing member 30a is displaced in such a manner that the lower end edge portion thereof falls down as a hinge in the right direction, and the first large winning opening 30b is opened (opened state). During this time, the first variable winning device 30 can enter the gaming ball and can generate an event of entering the first large winning opening 30b. At this time, the opening and closing member 30a also functions as a member for guiding the inflow of gaming balls into the first large winning opening 30b. The arrangement of obstacle nails installed in the game board unit 8 basically does not extremely inhibit the flow of the game ball toward the first variable winning device 30 (the first big winning opening 30b at the time of operation). However, the game ball does not necessarily enter the first variable winning device 30 at the time of operation, and the ball is randomly generated.

  The second variable winning device 31 operates when special conditions are satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a small hit) and enables entry to the second large winning opening 31b ( Special motorized role, second special winning event occurrence means). The second variable winning device 31 may operate when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a big hit.

  The second variable winning device 31 is a device disposed on the right side of the effect unit 40, and has, for example, one opening and closing member 31a. Although the first variable winning device 30 described above adopts a device in which the opening and closing member 30a falls in the right direction (a tulip-type tacker with one wing), the opening and closing member 31a of the second variable winning device 31 is It uses a sliding type of device inside the board (sliding attacker). The open / close member 31a reciprocates in the front-rear direction with respect to the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using, for example, a solenoid (not shown). The opening and closing member 31a is in the closed position (closed state) in a state of projecting to the player side from the board, and at this time, the gaming ball rolls on the upper surface of the opening and closing member 31a. Entry of the ball is difficult (the second big winning opening 31b is closed). Then, when the second variable winning device 31 operates, the opening and closing member 31a is drawn into the inside of the board, and the second large winning opening 31b is opened (opened state). During this time, the second variable winning device 31 is in a state in which the inflow of gaming balls is not difficult, and an event of entering the second large winning opening 31b can be generated.

[Specific area]
Further, a specific area 31x is provided in the second variable winning device 31. The specific area 31x is an area where it is difficult for the game ball to pass when the second variable winning device 31 is in the closed state, and the sliding member 31c for the specific region is the case where the second variable winning device 31 is in the open state. It is an area through which the game ball can pass when it is drawn into the inside of the board. The details of the second variable winning device 31 will be described later.

  Although not particularly illustrated, the second variable winning device 31 (the opening and closing member 31a) may be formed with a game ball rolling speed reduction portion that reduces the speed at which the game ball rolls. The game ball rolling speed lowering portion makes the inclination of the open / close member 31a gentle or forms alternately protruding projections for advancing the game ball in a zigzag position at the position where the game ball on the open / close member 31a passes. It can be realized. As a result, it is possible to cause the second variable winning device 31 to enter many game balls during the small hit game.

  In addition, an out port 32 is formed in the game area 8a, and game balls that have not been won are finally collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through the out port 32. In addition, the medium start winning opening 26, normal winning openings 22, 25, variable start winning device 28 (right start winning opening 28b), the first variable winning device 30 (first large winning opening 30b), the second variable winning device 31 ( All game balls driven into the game area 8a including the game balls entered in the second large winning opening 31b and the specific area) are collected to the back side of the game board unit 8. The collected game balls are discharged from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 through the out passage assembly (not shown) to the outside of the frame, and join the supply path of the island equipment (not shown).

4 and 5 show the details of the second variable winning device 31. FIG.
In the second variable winning device 31, the second large winning opening 31b is disposed below the sliding opening / closing member 31a. The inside of the second large winning opening 31b is inclined downward to the left, and the passage extends downward at the left end. A second count switch 85 is disposed in the passage extending downward, and the second count switch 85 counts the number of gaming balls entered into the second variable winning device 31.

And the passage extended downward is divided into two routes at the tip. One first passage 31 d extends downward as it is, and the other second passage 31 e branches to the left.
The specific region slide member 31c is disposed in the first passage 31d, and the specific region 31x is disposed downstream of the first passage 31d. In addition, the specific area switch not shown is arrange | positioned inside the specific area 31x.
On the other hand, no special member is disposed in the second passage 31e, and the discharge hole 31y is disposed downstream of the second passage 31e.

  The specific area slide member 31c is activated when a special condition is satisfied (after the first variable elapsed time after the second variable winning device 31 operates and before the second time elapses), to the specific area 31x. Allow passage of gaming balls. The specific area slide member 31c slides along the front-rear direction of the board by the action of a link mechanism using a specific area solenoid (not shown), for example. For example, after the first time has elapsed, 0.2 seconds have elapsed since the second variable winning device 31 was activated, and after the second time has elapsed, 1.8 seconds since the second variable winning device 31 has been activated. It is after the passage.

  When the specific area solenoid is in the OFF state, the specific area slide member 31c blocks the first passage 31d, so it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area 31x. On the other hand, when the specific area solenoid is in the ON state, the slide area for the specific area 31c is drawn to the inside of the board, so that the game ball can easily pass through the specific area 31x.

Next, the operation of the second variable winning device 31 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 4A, the slide type opening / closing member 31a is drawn into the inside of the board, and the gaming ball enters the second large winning opening 31b. In the illustrated example, four gaming balls are advancing toward the second big winning opening 31b. Here, this is the state immediately before the first gaming ball is detected by the second count switch 85.

  As shown in (B) in FIG. 4, the first gaming ball has reached the sliding region 31c for the specific area. The second and third gaming balls travel toward the second count switch 85. The fourth game ball is about to enter the second big winning opening 31b.

  As shown in (C) in FIG. 4, at this point in time, the first game ball is a slide for a specific area because the slide member 31c for a specific area is not drawn inward (because it is not in operation). The traveling direction is changed to the left by the member 31c, and travels through the second passage 31e. In this case, the first gaming ball is collected by the discharge hole 31y.

  As shown in (D) in FIG. 5, it is assumed that the slide member 31c for a specific area is pulled into the inside of the board at this time (during operation). In this case, the second gaming ball passes through the front side of the specific area slide member 31c and advances to the first passage 31d. The second gaming ball passes through the specific area 31x and is detected by the specific area switch.

  As shown in (E) in FIG. 5, the third gaming ball also passes through the near side of the specific area slide member 31c and advances to the first passage 31d. In this case, the third gaming ball passes through the specific area 31x and is detected by the specific area switch.

  As shown in (F) in FIG. 5, at this time, the operation of the specific area slide member 31 c is finished, and the specific area slide member 31 c is projected to the front side of the board surface. In this case, the fourth gaming ball is guided to the left by the specific area slide member 31c and advances to the second passage 31e. Then, the fourth gaming ball is collected by the discharge hole 31y.

FIG. 6 is an enlarged front view showing a part of the game board unit 8 (the lower left position in the window 4a).
In the game board unit 8, for example, a normal symbol display device 33 (normal symbol display means) and a normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a are provided at the lower right position in the window 4a, and a first special symbol display device 34 (first 1 symbol display means), a second special symbol display device 35 (second symbol display means), a first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, a second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a and a game state display device 38 are provided.

  Among them, the normal symbol display device 33 turns on, for example, two lamps (LEDs) alternately to display an ordinary symbol in a variable manner, and stops the normal symbol by turning on or off the lamp. The normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a displays 0 to 4 stored numbers, for example, by a combination of lighting or blinking of two lamps (LEDs). For example, in the display mode in which two lamps are turned off together, 0 is displayed, in the display mode in which one lamp is turned on, 1 is displayed, and in the display mode in which one same lamp is blinked. In the display mode in which two memories are displayed and one lamp is lighted and the other lamp is lighted, three memories are displayed, and in the display mode in which two lamps are blinked together, the memory number is four. It is in the condition of displaying pieces. Although two lamps (LEDs) are used here, four lamps (LEDs) may be used to form a normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a. In this case, the number of stored memories can be displayed by the number of lamps to be lit.

  Each time the game ball passes through the above-mentioned start gate 20, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a changes to a display mode after incrementing one by one in order to store the occurrence of the passage serving as the trigger of the operation lottery each time After passing (up to a maximum of 4), the symbol changes to a display mode after being reduced one by one every time fluctuation of the symbol is started. In the present embodiment, when the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a is not lighted (the number of memories is zero), the game ball passes through the starting gate 20 in the normal symbol changeable start state (during stop display) However, the display mode does not change. That is, the memory number (up to four) represented by the display mode of the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a represents the number of passes where fluctuation of the normal symbol has not yet started at that time.

  Also, the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 can display the variation state and the stop state of the special symbol by, for example, a 7-segment LED (with dots) (symbol display means, first Symbol display means, second symbol display means). In addition, the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 may have a form in which a plurality of dot LEDs are arranged geometrically (for example, circular).

  In addition, each of the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a and the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is, for example, 0 to 4 according to a display mode configured by combination of lighting or blinking of two lamps (LEDs) respectively. The number of stored data is displayed (stored number display means). For example, in a display mode in which two lamps are turned off together, 0 is displayed, in a display mode in which one lamp is turned on, 1 memory number is displayed, and in a display mode in which one same lamp blinks. In the display mode in which two memories are displayed, one lamp blinks and the other lamp is turned on, three memories are displayed, and in the display mode in which two lamps are blinked together, the memory count is displayed. It is condition of displaying 4 pieces etc.

  Each time the game ball enters the above-mentioned middle start winning opening 26, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a changes to a display mode after increment by one in order to memorize that the ball has occurred. Every time the special symbol changes are started, the display mode changes to one after each decrease. In addition, the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is one by one in the sense that memory is generated each time a game ball enters the above-mentioned variable start winning device 28 (right start winning opening 28b). It changes to the display mode after the increase (up to four at the maximum), and changes to the display mode after the decrease every time the variation of the special symbol is triggered by the entering of the ball. In the present embodiment, when the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is not lighted (the number of memories is zero), the first special symbol (first symbol) is already in a state where it can start fluctuation (during stop display) Even if the game ball enters the middle start winning opening 26, the display mode does not change. In addition, when the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is not lit (the number of memories is zero), the variable start winning device 28 is in a state (during stop display) that the second special symbol (the second symbol) can already start changing. Even if the game ball enters the (right start winning opening 28b), the display mode does not change. That is, the number of memories (maximum 4) represented by the display mode of each special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, 35a is the number of entering balls for which the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has not yet started at that time It represents the number of times.

  Further, the gaming state display device 38 includes, for example, six LEDs respectively corresponding to the big hit classification display lamps 38a and 38b, the short time status display lamp 38e, and the launch position designation display lamp 38f. In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned normal symbol display device 33, normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, first special symbol display device 34, second special symbol display device 35, first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, second special The symbol operation memory lamp 35a and the game state display device 38 are attached to the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display substrate 89.

[Other configurations of the game board: see FIG. 3]
The effect unit 40 has the upper edge 40a functioning as a guide member for changing the flow direction of the game ball, and further includes various decorative components 40b and 40c inside. The decorative parts 40b and 40c can enhance the decorativeness of the game board unit 8 by their three-dimensional shaping, and can perform an effect operation by emitting transmitted light by, for example, a built-in light emitter (LED or the like) . In addition, a liquid crystal display 42 (image display) is installed at the upper inside of the rendering unit 40, and the liquid crystal display 42 has a rendering symbol (this symbol) corresponding to a special symbol, a fourth symbol, Various effect images are displayed, including a storage marker (pending display). As described above, the game board unit 8 impresses the player with the features of the pachinko machine 1 based on the configuration of the board (the design of the cell board not shown) and the decorativeness of the effect unit 40.

Furthermore, a drum unit 200 is installed at the lower inside of the effect unit 40.
The drum unit 200 is provided with a left reel 201, a middle reel 202, and a right reel 203, and on each reel, a pseudo effect symbol (7 symbols, a panda symbol, a cherry symbol, etc.) is displayed. For example, when seven symbols of the same color are displayed on the middle line serving as the effective line, it indicates that the result of the big hit is obtained in the special symbol lottery. Each reel of the drum unit 200 is a movable body movable at a plurality of movable speeds.

  Further, a ball guiding passage 40 d is formed at the left edge of the effect unit 40. The ball guiding passage 40 d is connected to the lower rolling stage 40 e through the back side of the rendering unit 40. The ball guide passage 40d is opened obliquely upward to the left in the game area 8a, and when the game balls flowing down the game area 8a randomly flow into the ball guide passage 40d, they pass through the inside and roll. It is released onto the stage 40e. The upper surface of the rolling stage 40e has a smooth curved surface, and here, the gaming ball can roll in the left-right direction. The game balls rolled on the rolling stage 40 e eventually flow down into the lower game area 8 a. A ball release passage 40k is formed at the center position of the rolling stage 40e, and the gaming balls guided from the rolling stage 40e to the ball release passage 40k easily flow into the middle start winning opening 26 located immediately below it. .

  In addition, inside the upper center of the rendering unit 40, a driving source (for example, a motor, a solenoid, etc.) not shown is attached together with a movable body 40f for rendering (for example, a heart-shaped decoration). In addition to the effect using the image by the liquid crystal display 42 and the effect by the light emitter, the movable object 40 f for effect can execute the effect accompanied by the operation of the tangible object. By such an effect using the movable body 40 f, it is possible to exert an appeal different from an effect using a two-dimensional image.

[Configuration on control]
Next, the configuration regarding control of the pachinko machine 1 will be described. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing various electronic devices equipped in the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 is provided with a main control unit 70 (main control computer) which is central to control operation, and the main control unit 70 mainly has a function to control the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1 There is. Main controller 70 is incorporated in main control board unit 170 described above.

  The main control unit 70 is equipped with a circuit board (main control board) on which a main control CPU 72 which is a central processing unit is mounted. The main control CPU 72 controls the ROM 74, RAM (CPU core and registers not shown). The semiconductor memory such as RWM 76 is integrated as an LSI. Further, the main control device 70 is equipped with a random number generator 75 and a sampling circuit 77. Among them, the random number generator 75 generates a hardware random number (for example, 0 to 65535 in decimal notation) for the big hit determination of the special symbol lottery and the hit determination of the normal symbol lottery, and the random number generated here Are input to the main control CPU 72 through the sampling circuit 77. In addition, the main controller 70 is equipped with an input / output (I / O) port 79 and a peripheral IC such as a clock generation circuit (not shown), a counter / timer circuit (CTC), etc. These circuits together with the main control CPU 72 It is mounted on a board. A signal transmission path, a power supply path, a control bus and the like are formed as wiring patterns on the circuit board (or in the inner layer portion).

  A gate switch 78 for detecting passage of the game ball is integrally provided in the above-mentioned start gate 20. In addition, the game board unit 8 corresponds to the medium start winning opening 26, the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31, respectively, and the middle start winning opening switch 80 and the right start winning opening. A switch 82, a first count switch 84 and a second count switch 85 are provided. Each start winning opening switch 80, 82 is for detecting a winning of the game ball on the starting winning opening 26, the variable start winning device 28 (right starting winning opening 28b). Further, the count switch 84 is for detecting the winning of the game ball on the first variable winning device 30 (the first big winning opening 30b), and for counting the number thereof. Further, the second count switch 85 is for detecting the winning of the game ball on the second variable winning device 31 (second large winning opening 31b) and counting the number thereof.

  Besides, a specific area switch 83 is provided corresponding to the specific area 31x. A specific area switch 83 is provided at a position corresponding to the specific area 31x inside the second large winning opening 31b, and the specific area switch 83 detects that the gaming ball has passed the specific area 31x.

  Similarly, the game board unit 8 is equipped with a winning opening switch 86 for detecting the winning of the gaming ball to the normal winning openings 22 and 25. In addition, although the structure which uses the common winning opening switch 86 about all the normal winning openings 22 and 25 is mentioned as an example here, separate winning opening switches 86 are installed in the right and left of a board, for example, and the winning opening on the left side. The switch 86 detects the winning of the gaming ball to the normal winning openings 22 and 25 located on the left side of the board, and the right winning opening switch 86 detects the winning of the game balls to the normal winning port 25 located on the right of the board. It may be

  In any case, the winning detection signals and the passage detection signals of the switches 80, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86 are input to the main control CPU 72 via an input / output driver (not shown). In the present embodiment, the winning detection signal and the passage detection signal from the gate switch 78, the specific area switch 83, the count switch 84, and the winning opening switch 86 are transmitted through the panel relay terminal board 87 because of the configuration of the gaming board unit 8. The panel relay terminal board 87 is provided with a wiring pattern, connection terminals and the like for relaying the respective winning detection signals.

  The normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol display device 34, the second special symbol display device 35, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a and the game described above The display operation of the status display device 38 is controlled based on a control signal from the main control CPU 72. The main control CPU 72 outputs control signals to the display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and the lamps 33a, 34a, 35a in accordance with the progress of the game to control the lighting state of each LED. Further, the display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and the lamps 33a, 34a, 35a are installed in the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display substrate 89 as described above, and this integrated The control signal is transmitted from the main control CPU 72 to the display substrate 89 by relaying the panel relay terminal plate 87 described above.

  In addition, the game board unit 8 corresponds to the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, and the specific area 31x, respectively. 90, a second large winning opening solenoid 97 and a specific area solenoid 99 are provided. These solenoids 88, 90, 97, 99 operate (excited) based on the control signal from the main control CPU 72, and the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, and the specific area 31x, respectively. Open and close The control signal is transmitted from the main control CPU 72 by relaying the panel relay terminal plate 87 to the solenoids 88, 90, 97, 99 as well.

  In addition, a glass frame open switch 91 is installed in the integrated door unit 4 described above, and a plastic frame open switch 93 is installed in the inner frame assembly 7 described above. When integral door unit 4 is opened alone, a contact signal from glass frame open switch 91 is input to main controller 70 (main control CPU 72), and inner frame assembly 7 is released from outer frame unit 2 The contact signal from the plastic frame opening switch 93 is input to the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72). The main control CPU 72 can detect the open state of the integral door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 from these contact signals. When the main control CPU 72 detects the open state of the integral door unit 4 or the inner frame assembly 7, it generates a door open information signal as the above-mentioned external information signal.

  A payout control device 92 is equipped on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (special privilege giving means). The payout control device 92 (a payout control computer) controls the operation of the above-described payout device unit 172. The payout control device 92 is equipped with a circuit board (payout control substrate) on which the payout control CPU 94 is mounted. The payout control CPU 94 is also an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as the ROM 96 and RAM 98 are integrated with a CPU core not shown. It is configured. The payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 based on the winning ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, and executes the payout operation of the requested number of gaming balls. The main control CPU 72 generates a prize ball information signal as the above external information signal together with the prize ball instruction command.

  In the winning ball case (not shown) of the payout device unit 172, the payout device substrate 100 is disposed together with the payout motor 102 (for example, a stepping motor), and a drive circuit of the payout motor 102 is provided on the payout device substrate 100. There is. The payout device substrate 100 specifically controls the rotation angle of the payout motor 102 based on the payout number instruction signal from the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94), and pays the instructed number of gaming balls from the winning ball case. Let out. The game balls paid out are sent to the above-described tray unit 6 through the payout flow path in the flow path unit 173.

  Further, for example, the payout path ball out switch 104 is installed at the upstream position of the winning ball case, and the payout counting switch 106 is installed at the downstream position of the payout motor 102. Whenever the winning balls are actually paid out by the driving of the payout motor 102, the counting signal from the payout counting switch 106 is inputted to the payout device substrate 100 each time. Further, when the ball breakage occurs at the upstream position of the winning ball case, the contact signal from the payout path ball breakage switch 104 is input to the payout device substrate 100. The payout device substrate 100 transmits the input counting signal and contact signal to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). The payout control CPU 94 can detect the actual number of payouts and the out-of-ball condition based on the signal received from the payout device substrate 100.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1, for example, the full tank switch 161 is installed inside the lower plate 6 c (the position of the bowl when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1). The prize balls (game balls) actually paid out are discharged to the upper plate 6b through the above-mentioned flow path unit 173, but when the upper plate 6b is full with game balls, the game balls paid out more are It flows into the lower plate 6c as described above. Further, when the lower plate 6c becomes full with game balls, the full tank switch 161 is turned ON, and a full tank detection signal is input to the payout control device 92 (the payout control CPU 94). In response to this, the payout control CPU 94 temporarily suspends the further prize ball operation even when the prize ball instruction command is received from the main control CPU 72, and stores the number of unpaid prize balls remaining in the RAM 98. The memory of RAM 98 can be backed up even when the power is turned off, and even if a power failure (including a momentary power failure) occurs during the game, the unpaid prize ball remaining number information will not be lost .

  Further, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a launch control board 108 and a launch solenoid 110 are installed. Further, a ball feed solenoid 111 is provided in the tray unit 6. The launch control board 108, the launch solenoid 110, and the ball feed solenoid 111 constitute the above-described launch control board set 174. Among them, the launch control board 108 is provided with drive circuits for the launch solenoid 110 and the ball feed solenoid 111. ing. Among them, the ball feed solenoid 111 performs an operation of delivering the gaming balls stored in the tray unit 6 one by one to a predetermined launch position in the launcher case. Further, the firing solenoid 110 strikes the game ball sent to the shooting position, and performs an operation of continuously (intermittently) shooting one game ball toward the game area 8a as described above. Note that the firing interval of the game balls is, for example, an interval of about 0.6 seconds (within 100 per minute).

  On the other hand, the grip unit 16 located on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a firing lever volume 112, a touch sensor 114 and a firing stop switch 116. Among these, the firing lever volume 112 generates an analog signal that is proportional to the operation amount (so-called stroke) of the firing handle by the player. Also, the touch sensor 114 detects that the player's body is touching the grip unit 16 (launch handle) from the change in capacitance, and outputs a detection signal. Then, the firing stop switch 116 generates a firing stop signal (contact signal) according to the operation of the player.

  A discharge relay terminal plate 118 is installed in the above-described tray unit 6, and signals from the discharge lever volume 112, the touch sensor 114, and the release stop switch 116 are transmitted via the discharge relay terminal plate 118 to the release control board 108. Sent to Also, the drive signal from the emission control board 108 is applied to the ball feed solenoid 111 via the emission relay terminal plate 118. When the player manipulates the firing handle, the firing lever volume 112 generates an analog signal (which may be an encoded digital signal) according to the amount of manipulation, and the firing solenoid 110 is driven based on the signal at this time. As a result, the strength to launch the game ball is adjusted in accordance with the amount of operation of the player. When the detection signal from the touch sensor 114 is off (low level) or the emission stop signal is input from the emission stop switch 116, the drive circuit of the emission control board 108 stops the drive of the emission solenoid 110. Do. In addition, when the game device connection terminal plate 120 is connected to the launch relay terminal plate 118 and the CR unit is not connected to the game device connection terminal plate 120, the same release occurs. The drive circuit of the control board 108 stops the drive of the firing solenoid 110.

  Further, the tray unit 6 incorporates a frequency display board 122 and a lending and return switch board 123. Among these, the frequency display board 122 is provided with a display (7-segment LED for 3 digits) of the above-described frequency display unit. In addition, a switch module connected to the ball lending button 10 and the return button 12 is mounted on the lending and return switch substrate 123, and when the sphere lending button 10 or the return button 12 is operated, the operation signal is borrowed. And, it is transmitted from the return switch substrate 123 to the CR unit via the game apparatus connection terminal board 120 such as a game ball. Further, from the CR unit, a frequency signal indicating the remaining frequency of the valuable medium is transmitted to the frequency display board 122 via the game ball or the like lending device connection terminal board 120. A display circuit (not shown) on the frequency display substrate 122 drives the display based on the frequency signal, and numerically displays the remaining frequency of the valuable medium. In addition, when the value medium is not inserted into the CR unit, or when the remaining frequency of the input value medium becomes 0, the display circuit of the frequency display substrate 122 drives the display to display a demonstration (value medium You can also display a message prompting you to

  Moreover, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with the presentation control apparatus 124 (computer for presentation control) as a structure on control. The effect control device 124 controls effects according to the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. The presentation control device 124 is also equipped with a circuit board (composite sub control board) on which the presentation control CPU 126 which is a central processing unit is mounted. The effect control CPU 126 incorporates a semiconductor core such as the ROM 128 or the RAM 130 as a main memory together with a CPU core (not shown). The effect control device 124 is provided at a position covered by the back cover unit 178 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, the effect control device 124 is equipped with a lamp drive circuit 132 and an acoustic drive circuit 134 in addition to an input / output driver and various peripheral ICs (not shown). The effect control CPU 126 controls the effect based on the effect command sent from the main control CPU 72, and gives commands to the lamp drive circuit 132 and the sound drive circuit 134 to emit various lamps 46 to 52 and the panel lamp 53. Or processing for actually outputting sound effects, sounds, etc. from the speakers 54, 55, 56.

  The effect control device 124 and the main control device 70 described above are mutually connected via, for example, a communication harness (not shown). However, communication between them is performed only in one direction from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, and communication in the reverse direction is not performed. The communication harness may adopt a parallel format according to the bus width of various commands transmitted from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, and each driver IC (I / O) Serial format may be adopted according to the hardware configuration of

  The lamp drive circuit 132 includes, for example, switching elements such as PWM (pulse width modulation) ICs and MOSFETs (not shown), and the lamp drive circuit 132 switches (or switches duty for driving voltage applied to various lamps including LEDs). ) And manage the operations such as light emission and blinking. In addition to the glass frame top lamp 46 and the glass frame decoration lamps 48, 50, 52, the various lamps include a board lamp 53 for decoration and effect installed in the game board unit 8. The panel lamp 53 is equivalent to an LED incorporated in the above-mentioned effect unit or an LED incorporated in the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, and the like. In addition, although the example in which the glass frame decoration lamp 52 is connected to the glass frame electric decoration board 136 is mentioned here, the saucer electric decoration board is installed in the saucer unit 6, and the glass frame decoration lamp 52 It may be connected to the lamp driving circuit 132 through the substrate.

  Further, the sound drive circuit 134 is a sound generator incorporating, for example, a sound ROM, a sound control IC, an amplifier, etc. (not shown), and the sound drive circuit 134 drives the speakers 54 and 55 on the glass frame and the outer frame speaker 56. Sound output.

  In the present embodiment, the glass frame electric decoration substrate 136 is installed on the inner surface of the integral door unit 4, and drive signals from the lamp drive circuit 132 and the acoustic drive circuit 134 pass through the glass frame electric decoration substrate 136. To 52 and the speakers 54, 55, and 56. In addition, the above-mentioned effect switching button 45 is connected to the glass frame electric decoration substrate 136, and when the player operates the effect switching button 45, the contact signal is transmitted to the effect control device 124 through the glass frame electric decoration substrate 136. It is input. In addition, although the example which connected the production | presentation switch button 45 to the glass frame electric decoration board | substrate 136 here is mentioned, when installing said saucer electric decoration board | substrate, the production | presentation switching button 45 is connected to the saucer electric decoration board It is also good. In addition, a panel electric decoration board 138 is installed in the game board unit 8, and in addition to the board surface lamp 53, a movable body motor 57 is connected to the panel electric decoration board 138. The movable body motor 57 drives the movable body 40f through, for example, a link mechanism (not shown). The drive signal from the lamp drive circuit 132 is applied to the panel lamp 53 and the movable body motor 57 via the panel illumination board 138. The movable body motor 57 may be a solenoid.

[Drum unit]
Further, the drum unit 200 is connected to the effect control device 124.
The drum unit 200 includes a left reel 201, a middle reel 202, and a right reel 203 coaxially arranged. In the drum unit 200, each of the reels 201, 202 and 203 may be rephrased as a "drum".
The left reel 201, the middle reel 202, and the right reel 203 are each formed in an annular shape, around which a reel band having a plurality of pseudo rendering symbols attached in a line at intervals is wound. . The left reel 201, the middle reel 202, and the right reel 203 have rotation axes at their centers, and can rotate or reversely rotate around the rotation axes.

  Further, the drum unit 200 is provided with a stepping motor (not shown) corresponding to each reel (hereinafter, also simply referred to as a motor) and a position detection mechanism (not shown) corresponding to each reel. The position detection mechanism may be disposed inside the stepping motor or may be disposed outside the stepping motor. The position detection mechanism can be configured, for example, by a light shielding plate and a photo sensor.

  The stepping motor is driven by a drum unit controller (driver, IC) (not shown) that controls the drum unit 200. The drum unit control device drives each reel in accordance with the movable body data transmitted from the effect control device 124. In addition, the drum unit control device transmits a detection signal to the effect control device 124 in response to the detection of the position (for example, the origin position) of each reel detected by the position detection mechanism.

  Then, the effect control device 124 generates movable body data to be transmitted to the stepping motor corresponding to each reel based on the detection signal transmitted from the drum unit control device, and controls the operation of each reel.

  The stepping motor is a motor that drives each reel (movable body) alternately (one-two phase excitation drive) by alternately repeating one-phase excitation and two-phase excitation. A coil 4) is included.

  The liquid crystal display 42 described above is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the display screen can be viewed through a substantially rectangular opening formed in the game board unit 8. Further, an inverter board 158 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the inverter board 158 generates an AC power source applied to a backlight (for example, a cold cathode tube) of the liquid crystal display 42. Furthermore, the effect display control device 144 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42 is controlled by the effect display control device 144. The effect display control device 144 is equipped with a display control CPU 146 which is a general-purpose central processing unit, and a circuit board (effect display control substrate) on which a VDP 152 which is a display processor is mounted. Among them, the display control CPU 146 is configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as the ROM 148 and the RAM 150 are integrated with a CPU core (not shown). The VDP 152 is configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as the image ROM 154 and the VRAM 156 are integrated with a processor core (not shown). The VRAM 156 can use a part of the storage area as a frame buffer.

  The ROM 128 of the effect control CPU 126 stores a basic program related to effect control, and the effect control CPU 126 executes effect control in accordance with the program. The control of the effect includes the control of the effect using the various lamps 46 to 53 and the speakers 54, 55, and 56 as described above, and also the control of the effect by the image display using the liquid crystal display 42 . The effect control CPU 126 transmits basic information (for example, effect number) related to effects to the display control CPU 146, and the display control CPU 146 that has received the information specifically generates an effect image based on the basic information. Control to display.

  The display control CPU 146 outputs a more detailed control signal to the VDP 152. The VDP 152 having received this accesses the image ROM 154 based on the control signal, reads out necessary image data therefrom, and transfers it to the VRAM 156. Furthermore, the VDP 152 develops image data in the frame buffer for each frame (still image per unit time) on the VRAM 156, and each pixel (full color pixel) of the liquid crystal display 42 is individualized based on the image data buffered here. Drive to

  In addition, on the back side of the inner frame assembly 7, a power control unit 162 (power control means) is provided. The power supply control unit 162 incorporates a switching power supply circuit and can generate necessary power (for example, DC + 34V, + 12V or the like) from the outside power (for example, AC24V or the like) taken from the island facility through the power cord 164. The electric power generated by the power supply control unit 162 is distributed to the main control unit 70, the payout control unit 92, the effect control unit 124, and the inverter board 158. Furthermore, power is supplied to the firing control board 108 via the payout control device 92, and power is also supplied to the CR unit via the game apparatus connection terminal board 120 such as a game ball. The low voltage power (for example, DC + 5 V) for logic is generated by a power supply IC (three-terminal regulator or the like) incorporated in each device. Further, as described above, the power control unit 162 is grounded to the island facility through the ground wire 166.

  The external terminal board 160 described above is connected to the payout control device 92, and various external information signals generated by the main control unit 70 (main control CPU 72) are transmitted to the external terminal board 160 via the payout control device 92. It is output to the outside from. The main controller 70 (main control CPU 72) and the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) can output an external information signal to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the external terminal board 160. Signals output from the external terminal board 160 are collected, for example, by a hall computer (not shown) of the game arcade. Here, the configuration via the payout control device 92 is taken as an example, but the configuration may be such that the external information signal is output from the main control device 70 to the external terminal board 160 as it is.

  The above is the configuration example regarding control of the pachinko machine 1. Subsequently, control processing executed by the main control CPU 72 of the main control device 70 will be described.

[Reset start (main) processing]
When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control CPU 72 starts a reset start process. The reset start process prepares the initial state of the pachinko machine 1 by restoring the gaming state (so-called power recovery) based on the backup information stored at the time of the previous power shutoff or clearing the backup information conversely. It is a process for Further, the reset start process is positioned as a main process (main control program) for guaranteeing a stable gaming operation of the pachinko machine 1 after adjustment of the initial state.

  8 and 9 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the reset start process. Hereinafter, the process performed by the main control CPU 72 will be described step by step.

  Step S101: The main control CPU 72 first sets the top address of the stack area in the stack pointer.

  Step S102: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 sets the vector system interrupt mode (mode 2) and corrects the default RST system interrupt mode (mode 0). As a result, the main control CPU 72 can refer to an arbitrary address (but the least significant bit is 0) as an interrupt vector and execute the specified interrupt handler.

  Step S103: The main control CPU 72 executes here a reset waiting process. This processing is for securing a certain standby time (for example, several thousands of ms) at the time of reset start (for example, power on) and checking the main power failure detection signal during that time. Specifically, when the main control CPU 72 sets the loop counter for the waiting time, it checks the bit of the input port of the main power failure detection signal while decrementing the value of the loop counter. The main power failure detection signal is input from, for example, a power supply monitoring IC which is a peripheral device. Then, if the input of the main power failure detection signal is confirmed before the loop counter becomes 0, the main control CPU 72 resumes the processing from the beginning. As a result, for example, it is possible to achieve system protection when the operations of turning on and off the main power switch (not shown) are repeatedly performed within a short time (about 1 to 2 seconds).

  Step S104: Next, the main control CPU 72 permits access to the work area of the RAM 76. Specifically, the RAM protect set value in the work area is reset (00H). As a result, access to the work area of the RAM 76 is permitted thereafter.

  Step S105: Further, the main control CPU 72 initializes the mask register in order to set an interrupt mask. Specifically, the value for enabling the CTC interrupt is stored in the mask register.

  Step S106: The main control CPU 72 refers to the input signal from the RAM clear switch previously saved, and confirms whether the RAM clear switch has been operated (switch ON). If the RAM clear switch is not operated (No), then step S107 is executed.

  Step S107: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the backup information is stored in the RAM 76, that is, whether or not the backup validity determination flag is set. If the backup is normally ended in the previous power-off process and the backup validity determination flag (for example, “A55AH”) is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S108.

  Step S108: The main control CPU 72 executes a thumb check on the backup information in the RAM 76. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sum-checks all areas of the work area (user work area including the prohibited area and the stack area) of the RAM 76 except the backup validity determination flag and the sum check buffer. If the result of the thumb check is normal (Yes), then the main control CPU 72 executes step S109.

Step S109: The main control CPU 72 resets the backup validity determination flag (for example, "0000H").
Step S110: Further, the main control CPU 72 clears the command which was awaiting transmission immediately before the occurrence of the previous power-off.

  Step S111: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes effect control return processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 instructs the effect control device 124 to return a command (for example, a model specification command, a special symbol probability state specification command, an operation memory number increase effect command, an operation memory number decrease effect command, a remaining number Send a command, a special game state designation command, etc.). In response to this, the effect control device 124 performs the effect state (for example, the internal probability state, the display pattern of the effect pattern, the effect display mode of the operation memory number, the sound output content, various lamps) It is possible to restore the light emission state etc.).

  Step S112: The main control CPU 72 executes state recovery processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets various values in the work area of the RAM 76 based on the backup information, and the gaming state (for example, the display mode of the special symbol, the internal probability state, etc.) The operation memory contents, various flag states, random number update state, etc. are restored. Further, the main control CPU 72 restores the value of the PC register which has been backed up.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is operated when the power is turned on (step S106: Yes), when the backup validity determination flag is not set (step S107: No), or when the backup information is not normal. (Step S108: No), the main control CPU72 proceeds to step S113.

Step S113: The main control CPU 72 clears the stored contents other than the use prohibited area of the RAM 76. As a result, the work area and the stack area of the RAM 76 are all initialized, and even if valid backup information is stored, its contents are erased.
Step S114: Further, the main control CPU 72 performs initial setting of the RAM 76.

  Step S115: The main control CPU 72 executes effect control output processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs a command (command necessary for effect control) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 after the initial setting.

  Step S116: The main control CPU 72 executes a payout control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs an instruction command for starting the payout of the winning balls to the payout control device 92.

  Step S117: The main control CPU 72 executes CTC initialization processing to initialize CTC (counter / timer circuit) which is a peripheral device. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an interrupt vector register, and sets an interrupt count value (for example, 4 ms) in CTC. Thus, when a CTC interrupt occurs next, the main control CPU 72 can continue the processing from the program address of the PC register which has been backed up.

  When the above procedure is executed in the reset start process, the main control CPU 72 shifts to the main loop shown in FIG. 9 (connection symbol A → A).

  Step S118, Step S119: The main control CPU 72 prohibits the interruption, and then executes a power-off occurrence check process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 performs a bit check on the input port of the main power failure detection signal to monitor the occurrence of the power failure (reduction of the drive voltage). When the power is cut off, when the main control CPU 72 clears the output port buffer corresponding to the normal motor combination solenoid 88, the large winning opening solenoid 90, etc., the whole of the work area of the RAM 76 excluding the backup validity judgment flag and the sum check buffer Backup the contents of and save the sum result value in the sum check buffer. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the above effective value (for example, "A55AH") in the backup validity determination flag area, prohibits the access to the RAM 76, and stops the process (NOP). On the other hand, if power supply interruption does not occur, the main control CPU 72 executes step S120 next. There is also a well-known programming example in which the CPU executes the process at the time of the occurrence of the power-off as the non-maskable interrupt (NMI) process.

  Step S120: The main control CPU 72 executes an initial value update random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 increments random numbers for updating (changing) the initial values of various software random numbers. In the present embodiment, various random numbers (for example, a big hit symbol random number, a reach determination random number, a variation pattern decision random number, etc.) excluding the big hit decision random number (hardware random number) and the hit decision random number (hardware random number) corresponding to ordinary symbols. Is generated on the program. These software random numbers are updated by the loop counter within a predetermined range in another interrupt process (step S201 in FIG. 11), but in this process, the initial value of the loop counter (every value of the random number) Random numbers are not required to be changed). The initial value updating random number is used to change the initial value randomly, and in step S120, the initial value updating random number is updated. Note that the reason why step S120 is executed after the interruption is prohibited in step S118 is the same process as in the other interruption management process (step S202 in FIG. 11), so that the same process is repeated (conflict) ) To prevent. As described above, in the present embodiment, the big hit decision random number and the hit decision random number are hardware random numbers generated by the random number generator 75, and the update cycle thereof is faster than the timer interrupt cycle (eg several ms). Since it is (for example, several microseconds), there is no need to update the initial values of the jackpot decision random number and the hit decision random number.

  Steps S121 and S122: The main control CPU 72 permits interruption and performs other random number update processing. The random numbers updated in this process are random numbers (reach determination random numbers, fluctuation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) regardless of the determination of the winning type (hit type) among the software random numbers. This processing is performed in the remaining time when the main control CPU 72 executes another interrupt management process (FIG. 11) when a timer interrupt occurs while the main loop is being executed. The contents of the interrupt management process will be described later.

[Power-off occurrence check processing]
FIG. 10 is a flow chart specifically showing an example of the procedure of the power failure occurrence check process described above.
Step S130: Here, first, the main control CPU 72 sets conditions for a power supply interruption occurrence check. This check condition can be set, for example, as an on-counter value for confirming that the main power failure detection signal is continuously output.

  Step S132: Next, the main control CPU 72 reads the main power failure detection switch input port, and confirms whether or not the main power failure detection signal is output (checks a specific bit). Although not particularly shown, the main power failure detection switch is mounted, for example, on the main control device 70, and this main power failure detection switch monitors the drive voltage supplied from the power control unit 162, and the voltage level is When the voltage drops below the reference voltage, the main power failure detection signal is output. The main power failure detection switch may be incorporated in the power control unit 162. When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the main power failure detection signal is not output at the present time (No), the main control CPU 72 exits this processing and returns to the reset start processing. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the main power failure detection signal is output (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S134.

  Step S134: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the above-mentioned check condition is satisfied. Specifically, for example, 1 is subtracted from the on-counter value set in the previous step S130, and it is checked whether the result is 0 or not. If the on-counter value is not 0 at this point in time (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to step S132 to check the main power failure detection switch input port again. Then, when the check condition is satisfied by repeating the loop from step S134 to step S132 (step S134: Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S136.

  Step S136: The main control CPU 72 clears the output port buffer corresponding to the test signal terminal and the command control signal in addition to the output port corresponding to the normal motorized combination product solenoid 88 and the big winning opening solenoid 90 as described above.

Steps S138 and S140: Next, the main control CPU 72 adds the entire contents of the work area of the RAM 76 excluding the backup validity determination flag and the sum check buffer in 1-byte units, and repeats until addition is completed for all areas. .
Step S142: When the calculation of the sum is completed for the entire area (step S140: Yes), the main control CPU 72 stores the sum result value in the sum check buffer.

Step S144: Next, the main control CPU 72 stores the valid value in the backup validity determination flag area as described above.
Step S146: Further, the main control CPU 72 stores “01H” representing the access prohibition as the protect value of the RAM 76, and prohibits the access to the work area (including the unusable area and the stack area) of the RAM 76.
Step S148: The main control CPU 72 then enters a standby loop, and stops all other processing in preparation for interruption of the main power supply. After the occurrence of a main power failure, backup power is supplied from a backup power supply circuit (for example, a circuit including a capacitive element mounted on the main control device 70) not shown, so the stored contents of the RAM 76 are lost even after the main power failure. It is held without doing. The backup power supply circuit may be incorporated in the power control unit 162, for example.

  Through the above processing, all the information stored in the work area of the RAM 76 to be backed up (sum addition target) is retained as storage in the RAM 76 even after the main power is turned off. Further, the stored storage is restored as backup information at the time of power-off after confirming that the checksum is normal in the previous reset start processing (FIG. 8).

[Interrupt management processing (timer interrupt processing)]
Next, the interrupt management process (timer interrupt process) will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the interrupt management process. The main control CPU 72 executes interrupt management processing every predetermined time (for example, several ms) based on the interrupt request signal from the counter / timer circuit. Each step will be described below.

  Step S200: First, the main control CPU 72 saves the values of the registers (each pair of the accumulator A and the flag register F and the general purpose registers B to L) used during execution of the main loop in the save area of the RAM 76. In the registers (A to L) after the values are saved, another value can be written in the interrupt management process.

  Step S201: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes lottery random number update processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 updates the value of the counter for generating various random numbers for lottery. The value of each counter is incremented in the counter area of the RAM 76, and loops within a prescribed range. The various random numbers include, for example, a jackpot symbol random number and the like.

  Step S202: The main control CPU 72 executes initial value update random number update processing here as well. The contents of the process are the same as described above.

  Step S203: The main control CPU 72 executes an input process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 inputs various switch signals from the input / output (I / O) port 79. Specifically, the passage detection signal from gate switch 78, middle start winning opening switch 80, right starting winning opening switch 82, first count switch 84, second count switch 85, winning opening switch 86, specific area switch 83 Read the input status (ON / OFF) of the winning detection signal from.

  Step S204: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes switch input event processing. In this process, among the switch signals input in the previous input process, gate switch 78, middle start winning opening switch 80, right start winning opening switch 82, first count switch 84, second count switch 85, specific area switch 83 Based on the passage detection signal from, the determination of the event that occurred during the game is performed, and in accordance with each of the events that occurred, the further processing is executed. The specific contents of the switch input event process will be described later using another flowchart.

  In the present embodiment, when a winning detection signal (ON) is input from the middle start winning opening switch 80 or the right starting winning opening switch 82, the main control CPU 72 is an internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, respectively. It is determined that an event that is a trigger (lottery trigger, first lottery trigger, second lottery trigger) has occurred. In addition, when the passage detection signal (ON) is input from the gate switch 78, the main control CPU 72 determines that an event serving as a lottery trigger corresponding to the normal symbol has occurred. If it is determined that one of the events has occurred, the main control CPU 72 executes processing in accordance with each occurrence event. The process executed when a winning detection signal is input from the middle start winning opening switch 80 or the right start winning opening switch 82 will be described later using another flowchart.

  Step S205, Step S206: The main control CPU 72 executes special symbol game processing and normal symbol game processing during the interrupt management processing. These processes are for advancing the game in the pachinko machine 1 specifically. Among them, in the special symbol game processing (step S205), the main control CPU 72 controls the execution of the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol described above, the first special symbol display device 34 and the first 2 Control the variable display and the stop display by the special symbol display device 35, or control the operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 according to the display result. In addition, the details of the special symbol game process will be described later using another flowchart.

  Further, in the normal symbol game processing (step S206), the main control CPU 72 controls the variable display and the stop display by the normal symbol display device 33 described above, and operates the variable start winning device 28 according to the display result. Control. For example, the main control CPU 72 stores the random number (determination random number per normal symbol) acquired triggered by the passage of the start gate 20 in the previous switch input event processing (step S204), and in this normal symbol game processing The random number value is read out from the memory and it is judged whether or not it falls within a predetermined hit range (normal symbol lottery execution means). When the random number value falls within the hit range, the main control CPU 72 controls the normal motor combination solenoid 88 after the normal symbol is variably displayed by the normal symbol display device 33 and the stop display of the normal symbol is performed in the predetermined hit mode. It excites and operates the variable start winning device 28 (movable piece operating means). On the other hand, if the random number value is out of the hit range, the main control CPU 72 performs the stop display of the normal symbol in the form of the offset after the fluctuation display.

  Step S207: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a prize ball payout process. In this process, based on the winning detection signals input from the various switches 80, 82, 84, 85, 86 in the previous input process (step S203), an award ball instruction for instructing the payout control device 92 to determine the number of award balls. Output command

[Regarding the number of winning balls and the number of winning gaming balls]
The number of winning balls of the starting opening of the first special symbol and the number of winning balls of the starting opening of the second special symbol are respectively set to one or more specified numbers. Also, the number of winning balls may be made different between the starting opening of the first special symbol and the starting opening of the second special symbol. Furthermore, based on the winning probability of the special symbol and the expected value of the total number of acquired game balls (average number of balls obtained in a series of periods from the first hit to the end of the time saving state), the lowest winning ball number is set You may Furthermore, the probability of winning special symbols, the expected value of the total number of acquired game balls, the number of opening of the big winning opening, the opening time of the big winning opening, the maximum number of winnings of the big winning opening, and the number of winning balls of the big winning opening are predetermined. If the condition is satisfied, a big hit may be set such that the number of winning game balls per one big hit is less than 1⁄4 of the maximum number of winning ball games.

  Step S208: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes external information processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sends the above external information signal (for example, winning ball information, door opening information, symbol determination frequency information, big hit information, starting opening information, etc.) to the hall computer of the game arcade through the external terminal board 160. Store in port output request buffer.

  In the present embodiment, among the various external information signals, for example, “big hit 1” to “big hit 5” as the big hit information is outputted to the outside, so that the external electronic device connected to the pachinko machine 1 (data display Can provide a variety of jackpot information (external information signal output means). That is, by dividing and outputting the big hit information into a plurality of "big hit 1" to "big hit 5", the type (winning type) of big hit from these combinations can be totaled / managed by a hall computer (not shown), or internally Recognize changes in probability state (low probability state or high probability state) or shortened state of symbol variation time, or generate small hits (hits that the condition device does not work) that is not classified as a "big hit" even if not elected Can be calculated and managed. In addition, based on the jackpot information, for example by the data display device (not shown) to count and display the number of big hit occurrences within the past several business days for each pachinko machine 1 and recognize whether it is currently a big hit for each platform It is also possible to recognize whether or not the symbol variation time is currently being shortened for each table. In this external information processing, the main control CPU 72 controls in detail the output state (set of ON or OFF) of each of “big hit 1” to “big hit 5”.

  Step S209: Further, the main control CPU 72 executes test signal processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates various test signals representing its own internal state (for example, normal symbol game management state, special symbol game management state, big hit, probability change function being activated, time shortening function being activated) And store them in the port output request buffer. With this test signal, for example, the internal state of the main control CPU 72 can be tested outside the main control device 70.

  Step S210: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes display output management processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 controls the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol display device 34, the second special symbol display device 35, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, the second special symbol The lighting state of the operation memory lamp 35a, the gaming state display device 38, etc. is controlled. Specifically, the drive signal stored in the port output request buffer in the special symbol gaming process (step S205) or the normal symbol gaming process (step S206) is port-outputted. The drive signal is stored in the port output request buffer as byte data to be applied to each LED. As a result, each LED is driven in a predetermined display mode (a mode in which a variable display or stop display of symbols, an operation memory number display, a game state display, etc. is performed).

  Step S211: Further, the main control CPU 72 executes an output management process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 port-outputs the external information signal (byte data) stored in the port output request buffer in the previous external information processing (step S208). In addition, the main control CPU 72 is a drive signal of the common electric role product solenoid 88, the first large winning opening solenoid 90, the second large winning opening solenoid 97 and the specific area solenoid 99 stored in the port output request buffer, and a test signal Match ports etc.

  Step S212: The main control CPU 72 executes effect control output processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 checks whether there is a command to be sent to the effect control device 124 (command necessary for effect control) in the command buffer, and if there is an unsent command, the output target command Port out.

  Step S213: Then, the main control CPU 72 clears the port output request buffer stored by this CTC interrupt.

  In the present embodiment, an example in which the processing (game control program module) of step S205 to step S212 is executed as timer interrupt processing is given, but these processings are executed by being incorporated in the main loop of the CPU There are also known programming examples.

  Step S214: When the above processing is finished, the main control CPU 72 stores a value (01H) for designating the interrupt termination in the interrupt program counter, and terminates the CTC interrupt.

  Steps S215 and S216: Then, the main control CPU 72 restores the values of the saved registers (A to L) and permits the next CTC interrupt. Thereafter, the main control CPU 72 returns to the main loop (the program address designated by the stack pointer).

[Switch input event processing]
FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of switch input event processing (step S204 in FIG. 11). Each step will be described below.

  Step S10: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not a winning detection signal has been input (a lottery trigger has been generated) from the middle start winning opening switch 80 corresponding to the first special symbol. If the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S12 and executes the first special symbol storage update process. The contents of the specific processing will be described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, when there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU72 proceeds to step S14.

  Step S14: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not a winning detection signal is input (a lottery trigger has been generated) from the right start winning opening switch 82 corresponding to the second special symbol. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S16 and executes the second special symbol memory updating process. Also here, the contents of the specific processing will be further described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, when there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU72 proceeds to step S18.

  Step S18: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not a winning detection signal is input from the first count switch 84 corresponding to the first large winning opening 30b of the first variable winning device 30. If the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S19 and executes the first large winning opening count processing. In the first large winning opening count processing, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the first variable winning device 30 per round during the big hit game. On the other hand, when there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU72 proceeds to step S20.

  Step S20: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not a winning detection signal is input from the second count switch 85 corresponding to the second large winning opening 31b of the second variable winning device 31. If the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S21 and executes the second large winning opening count processing. In the second large winning opening count processing, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the second variable winning device 31 during a big hit game (during a small hit game). On the other hand, when there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU72 proceeds to step S22.

  Step S22: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a passage detection signal is input from the gate switch 78 corresponding to the normal symbol. If the input of the passage detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S24 and executes the normal symbol storage update process. In the normal symbol memory update process, the main control CPU 72 checks whether the current number of normal symbol operation memory numbers is less than the upper limit number (for example, four), and obtains the random number per normal symbol if the upper limit number is not reached. Do. Further, the main control CPU 72 normally increments the number of symbol operation memories by one. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the acquired random number value per symbol in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. On the other hand, when there is no input of the passage detection signal (No), the main control CPU72 proceeds to step S26.

  Step S26: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not a passage detection signal is input from the specific area switch 83 corresponding to the specific area 31x in the second big winning opening 31b. If the input of the passage detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S28 and executes a process of turning on the specific area reserve flag. On the other hand, when there is no input of the passage detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the interrupt management process (FIG. 11).

[First special symbol memory update process]
FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the first special symbol storage update process (step S12 in FIG. 12). Hereinafter, the procedure of the first special symbol storage update process will be described in order.

  Step S30: Here, first, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the first special symbol operating memory number counter to check whether the operating memory number is less than the maximum value (for example, 4). The working memory number counter represents the number (number of groups) of the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, etc. stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. Here, the random number storage area of the RAM 76 is divided into eight sections (for example, 2 bytes each) commonly used by the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and each section is a big hit decision random number and a big hit symbol The random numbers can be stored in sets one by one. At this time, if the value of the operation memory number counter corresponding to the first special symbol has reached the maximum value (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 12). On the other hand, if the value of the operation memory number counter is less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S31a.

  Step S31a: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the current first special symbol operating memory number counter is zero. If the operation memory number counter value is other than 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S31 c, but if the operation memory number counter value is 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S31 b.

  Step S31 b: The main control CPU 72 sets a flag corresponding to the current first special symbol operating memory number counter value = 0 in the memory area of the RAM 76. The flag of "the first special symbol winning pre-operation winning memory count = 0" set here can be referred to in another processing by the main control CPU 72. In addition, at this time, the flag is set only when the value of the "first special symbol winning pre-winning game storage number" is zero. That is, if the value of the first special symbol operation memory number counter is "0" at present, the above flag is set, but the value of the first special symbol operation memory number counter is "1" other than "0". If ~, the step S31 b is not executed.

  Step S31 c: The main control CPU 72 adds one to the first special symbol operation memory number. The first special symbol operation memory number counter is stored, for example, in the operation memory number area of the RAM 76, and the main control CPU 72 increments (+1) the value. Based on the value of the counter added here, the lighting state of the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is controlled in the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 11). In the case where the first special symbol operation memory number counter value is 0, since the flag of "first special symbol prize pre-operation memory number = 0" has already been set in the previous step S31b, here the first Even if the value of the special symbol operating memory number counter is added, no problem occurs in the subsequent processing. In addition, processing using a flag of "first special symbol winning pre-action winning memory count = 0" will be described later using another flowchart.

  Step S32: Then, the main control CPU 72 acquires the big hit determination random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (acquisition of first lottery element, lottery element acquisition means). The acquisition of the random number value is performed by specifying the pin address of the random number generator 75. When the main control CPU 72 performs 8-bit processing, the designation of the address is performed twice in one byte each in the high order and low order. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot determination random number value from the designated address, the main control CPU 72 saves the same as the jackpot determination random number corresponding to the first special symbol in the transfer destination address.

  Step S33: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires a jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76. The acquisition of the random number value is also performed by specifying the address of the jackpot symbol random number counter area. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot symbol random number value from the designated address, the main control CPU 72 saves the value as the jackpot symbol random number corresponding to the first special symbol in the transfer destination address.

  Step S34: Also, the main control CPU 72 acquires reach determination random numbers and fluctuation pattern determination random numbers in order from the random number counter area for fluctuation of the RAM 76 as random number values related to the fluctuation conditions of the first special symbol (acquisition of fluctuation pattern determination elements means). Similarly, acquisition of these random number values is performed by specifying the address of the variable random number counter area. Then, when the reach control random number and the variation pattern determination random number are respectively acquired from the designated address, the main control CPU 72 saves them in the transfer destination address.

  Step S35: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved big hit determination random number, big hit symbol random number, reach determination random number, and variation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the first special symbol, and these random numbers are free sections in the area. To store in a set (first lottery element storage means). The order (for example, the first to fourth) is set in the plurality of sections, and if all the first to fourth sections are empty at the current stage, the random numbers are stored sequentially from the first section. Alternatively, if the first section is already filled and the other second to fourth sections are empty, each random number is stored sequentially from the second section. The random number storage area is read out in the FIFO (First In First Out) format.

  Step S36: Next, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the current special game management status (gaming state) is a big hit, or in the previous step S31 b, “the first special symbol winning pre-operation memory count = 0”. Check if the flag has been set. If it is not a big hit and the flag of "the first special symbol before winning a prize winning operation memory count = 0" is not set (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S37 and S38. If the jackpot is in progress or the flag of "the first special symbol winning pre-operation prize storage count = 0" has been set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S37 and S38 and proceeds to step S38a. In this embodiment, this judgment is made because no effect is given by pre-reading for entering balls that occur during a big hit, and the first special symbol operating memory number is 0 when entering the middle start winning opening 26. In this case, the effect is not performed by pre-reading.

  Step S37: Other than during a big hit, and when the flag "first special symbol winning pre-operation memory number = 0" is not set (step S36: No), when the main control CPU72 is acquired for the first special symbol Execute the effect determination process. In this process, based on the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number and the variation pattern determination random number of the first special symbol acquired in the previous steps S32 to S34, the result and the variation time of the special symbol lottery are made in advance (before the variation start) To determine the effect contents (so-called "pre-reading"). In this process, the result of the prior determination of the first special symbol is set to the lower byte of the special drawing destination determination effect command.

  Step S38: When the effect determination process at the time of acquisition is executed, next, the main control CPU 72 sets the upper byte (for example, "B8H") of the special drawing destination determination effect command regarding the first special symbol. The upper byte data describes that the command type is "for special drawing destination determination effect regarding the first special symbol". Note that the lower byte portion of the special drawing destination determination effect command (information regarding the pass / fail information and information regarding the change time) is set in the previous acquisition effect determination process (step S37), so here the upper byte is combined with the lower byte. By doing this, for example, a command of 1 word length is generated.

  Step S38a: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect memory number increase effect command for the first special symbol. Specifically, for the leading value (for example, "BBH") of the upper byte representing the type of command, the 1-word length is obtained by adding the number of working storages after increase (for example, "01H" to "04H") to the lower byte Generate a rendering command. At this time, for the lower byte, the second digit is set to “0” by default, which indicates that the value is “the result (change information) due to the increase in the number of working storages”. That is, if the lower byte is "01H", it indicates that the number of current working memories becomes "01H" as a result of increasing one from the last working memory number "00H". Similarly, if the lower byte is "02H" to "04H", the number of working memories at this time is "02H" to "02H" as a result of being increased by one each from the previous working memory numbers "01H" to "03H". It shows that it became "04H". In addition, said leading value "BBH" is a value showing that this presentation command is the operation memory number command about the 1st special symbol.

  Step S39: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes an effect command output setting process for the first special symbol. In this process, the special drawing destination determination effect command generated in step S38, the effect memory number increase effect effect command generated in step S38a, and the start opening winning sound control command are transmitted to the effect control device 124 (see FIG. Memory number notification means).

  The main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 12) when the above procedure is completed or when the first special symbol operation memory number has reached 4 (step S30: No).

[Second special symbol memory update process]
Next, FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing a procedure example of the second special symbol storage update process (step S16 in FIG. 12). Hereinafter, the procedure of the second special symbol memory updating process will be described in order.

  Step S40: The main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the second special symbol operating memory number counter to check whether the operating memory number is less than the maximum value. Similarly to the above, the second special symbol operating memory number counter represents the number (group number) of the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, etc. stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. At this time, if the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter reaches the maximum value (for example, 4) (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 12). On the other hand, if the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter is still less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU72 proceeds to the next step S41a and subsequent steps.

  Step S41a: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the current second special symbol operation memory number counter is zero. If the operation memory number counter value is other than 0 (No), the main control CPU72 proceeds to step S41c, but if the operation memory number counter value is 0 (Yes), the main control CPU72 executes step S41b.

  Step S41 b: The main control CPU 72 sets a flag corresponding to the current value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter = 0 in the storage area of the RAM 76. The flag of "the second special symbol winning pre-operation winning memory count = 0" set here can also be referred to in another processing by the main control CPU 72. Similarly, at this time, the flag is set only when the value of the "second special symbol winning pre-action memory number" is zero. That is, if the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter is currently "1" to "3" other than "0", step S41b is not executed.

  Step S41c: The main control CPU 72 adds one to the second special symbol operation memory number (increments the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter). As in the previous step S31c (FIG. 13), the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 11) controls the lighting state of the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a based on the value of the counter added here. It will be In the case where the second special symbol operation memory number counter value is 0, since the flag of "second special symbol prize pre-operation memory number = 0" has already been set in the previous step S41 b, here 2 Even if the value of the special symbol operation memory number counter is added, no problem occurs in the subsequent processing. In addition, processing using a flag of “second special symbol winning pre-action winning memory count = 0” will be described later using another flowchart.

  Step S42: Then, the main control CPU 72 acquires the big hit determination random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (acquisition of second lottery element, lottery element acquisition means). The method of acquiring the random value is the same as step S32 (FIG. 13) described above.

  Step S43: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires a jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76. The method of acquiring the random value is the same as step S33 (FIG. 13) described above.

  Step S44: Further, the main control CPU 72 acquires reach determination random numbers and fluctuation pattern determination random numbers regarding fluctuation conditions of the second special symbol in order from the fluctuation random number counter area of the RAM 76 (fluctuation pattern determination element acquisition means). Acquisition of these random numbers is also performed in the same manner as step S34 (FIG. 13) described above.

  Step S45: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, the reach determination random number, and the variation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the second special symbol, and these random numbers are free sections in the area. The second lottery element storage means is stored as a set. The storage method is the same as step S35 (FIG. 13) described above.

  Step S45a: Next, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the current game management status (gaming state) is in a big hit, or in the previous step S41 b, the flag of “2nd special symbol winning pre-operation memory count = 0”. Check if the has been set. If the flag is not set to "2nd special symbol winning pre-operation prize storage count = 0" (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S46 and S47. Conversely, if the flag is in the middle of a big hit, or the "second special symbol winning pre-operation prize memory = 0" has been set (Yes), the main control CPU72 skips steps S46 and S47 and goes to step S48 move on. In this embodiment, this judgment is also performed for the ball entering during the big hit, without performing effects by the look-ahead, and also when the second special symbol operating memory number is entered when entering the right start winning opening 28a In the case of 0, it is because the effect by prefetching is not performed.

  Step S46: If it is other than during a big hit and the flag of "the second special symbol winning pre-operation memory number = 0" is not set (step S45a: No), then the main control CPU72, the second special symbol Execute the effect determination process at the time of acquisition. This processing determines the result of the internal lottery in advance (before the start of fluctuation) based on the big hit determination random number and the big hit symbol random number of the second special symbol obtained in the previous steps S42 to S44 respectively, and thereby the effect contents It is for judging. In this process, the result of the prior determination of the second special symbol is set to the lower byte of the special drawing destination determination effect command.

  Step S47: After executing the acquisition effect determination process, next, the main control CPU 72 sets the upper byte (for example, "B9H") of the special drawing destination determination effect command. The upper byte data describes that the command type is “for special drawing destination determination effect regarding the second special symbol”. Similarly, since the lower byte portion of the special drawing destination determination effect command is set in the preceding acquisition-time effect determination process (step S46), the upper byte is combined with the lower byte, for example, 1 word length Command will be generated.

  Step S48: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect memory number increase effect command for the second special symbol. Here, an effect command of 1 word length obtained by adding, to the lower byte, the operation storage number (for example, “01H” to “04H”) after increase for the leading value (for example, “BCH”) of the upper byte indicating the type of command Generate Similarly for the second special symbol, by defaulting the second digit of the lower byte to "0" by default, it is possible to represent that the value is "the result (change information) due to an increase in the number of working memories". it can. In addition, precedence value "BCH" is a value showing that the present production command is an operation memory number command about the 2nd special symbol.

  Step S49: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes effect command output setting processing for the second special symbol. As a result, a special drawing destination determination effect command, an operation memory number increase effect command, a starting opening winning sound control command and the like regarding the second special symbol are transmitted to the effect control device 124 (memory number notification means). When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 12).

[Determination process at acquisition]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of the effect determination process at the time of acquisition. The main control CPU 72 executes this effect determination process at the time of acquisition in the first first special symbol storage update processing and the second special symbol storage update processing (step S37 in FIG. 13 and step S46 in FIG. 14) (prior determination means). As described above, this process is executed for each of the first special symbol (when entering the middle starting winning opening 26) and the second special symbol (when entering the variable starting winning device 28). Therefore, the following description may correspond to processing relating to the first special symbol and to processing relating to the second special symbol. The contents of the process will be described below along each procedure.

  Step S50: The main control CPU 72 sets the lower byte portion (for example, "00H") of the special drawing destination determination effect command (destination determination information). The byte data set here represents the standard value of the command (at the time of disconnection).

  Step S52: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot decision random number as the first judgment random number value. The random numbers to be loaded here are stored in the RAM 76 in the first special symbol storage update process (step S35 in FIG. 13) or the second special symbol storage update process (step S45 in FIG. 14). .

  Step S54: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the loaded random number is out of the range of the hit value (here, the lower limit value or less) (lottery result destination judging means, prior judging means). Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a comparison value (lower limit value) in the A register, and subtracts the loaded random value from the comparison value. The comparison value (lower limit value) is defined in advance in accordance with the jackpot probability of the special symbol lottery in the pachinko machine 1. Next, the main control CPU 72 determines, for example, from the value of the flag register whether the operation result is 0 or a positive value. As a result, if the loaded random number is out of the hit value range (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S80.

  Step S80: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes an out-of-time variation pattern information predetermination process (variation pattern destination determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command for the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection. The prior determination information regarding the variation time (or variation pattern number) particularly at the time of operation of the “time shortening function” is reflected in the variation pattern destination determination command generated here. For example, if the current state is at the time of operation of "time reduction function", the main control CPU 72 corresponds to "outgoing reach fluctuation (non-shortened fluctuation time)" based on the reach determination random number loaded. Determine if there is. As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to "a loss reach fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to "time reduction". In the case of reach variation, "reach group (type of reach)" may also be determined from reach mode random numbers, and a variation pattern destination determination command may be generated from the result. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time does not correspond to the "outreach reach fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to "time reduction". Alternatively, if the current state is the non-operation time (low probability state) of the "time reduction function", the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the "normally out of reach reach fluctuation" based on the loaded reach determination random number It is determined whether or not As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to the “normal shift reach fluctuation”, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the “normal shift reach fluctuation time”. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time does not correspond to “normal deviation reach fluctuation”, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to “normal deviation fluctuation time”. Further, the variation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the rendering command output setting process (steps S39 and S49). In this process, the main control CPU 72 may generate a variation pattern destination determination command for the variation pattern in the small hit, as in the case of the process in the above-described disconnection.

  When the above procedure is executed, the main control CPU 72 ends the acquisition effect determination processing, and returns to the first special symbol storage update processing (FIG. 13) or the second special symbol storage update processing (FIG. 14) of the caller. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S54 that the loaded random number is not out of the hit value range but within the hit value range (step S54: No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S74.

  Step S74: The main control CPU 72 executes jackpot symbol type determination processing. This process is for determining the type of big hit (winning type) at that time based on the big hit symbol random number which is paired with the big hit determination random number. For example, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot symbol random numbers of the symbols stored in the first special symbol storage update process (step S35 in FIG. 13) or the second special symbol storage update process (step S45 in FIG. 14). Then, the calculation using the comparison value is executed in the same manner as in step S54, and it is determined from the result that which winning symbol corresponds. The main control CPU 72 stores the determination result at this time as a special symbol destination determination value, and proceeds to the next step S78.

  Step S78: The main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 as the lower byte of the special drawing destination determination effect command. For example, the special symbol destination determination value is set to "00H" if it corresponds to "a symbol that does not shift to a time reduction state", and "01H" is set if it corresponds to a "symbol to shift to a time reduction state" . In any case, by setting the lower byte data, the standard lower byte data "00H" set in the previous step S50 is rewritten.

  Step S79: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot variation pattern information prior determination process (variation pattern destination determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern destination determination command for the fluctuation time at the time of big hit. For example, prior determination information on the reach variation time (or variation pattern number) at the time of a big hit is reflected in the variation pattern destination determination command generated here. Further, the variation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the rendering command output setting process (steps S39 and S49).

  When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the first special symbol storage update process (FIG. 13) or the second special symbol storage update process (FIG. 14).

[Special symbol game processing]
Next, the details of the special symbol game process executed in the interrupt management process (FIG. 11) will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the special symbol game process. Special symbol game processing is execution selection processing (step S1000), special symbol variation pre-processing (step S2000), special symbol variation processing (step S3000), special symbol stop display processing (step S4000), variable winning device management processing (Step S5000) is a configuration including a subroutine (program module) group. Here, first, the basic flow of the special symbol game process will be described along each process.

  Step S1000: In the execution selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects a jump destination of a process to be performed next (any one of steps S2000 to S5000) from the "jump table". For example, the main control CPU 72 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the special symbol game process in the stack pointer as the return destination address.

  Which process to select as the next jump destination differs depending on the progress status of the process performed so far (special symbol game management status). For example, if the special symbol has not yet started variable display (special symbol game management status: 00H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol fluctuation pre-processing (step S2000) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the special symbol variation pre-processing has already been completed (special symbol game management status: 01H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol variation processing (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and the special symbol variation is in progress. If the processing has been completed (special symbol game management status: 02H), the special symbol stop display processing (step S4000) is selected as the next jump destination. In the present embodiment, the address of the jump destination is specified in the “jump table” and the process is selected. However, the “process flag”, the “process selection flag”, etc. are used separately from such a selection method. There are also known programming examples in which the CPU chooses what to do next. In such a programming example, the CPU calls each processing as it goes through and makes conditional branching (continuation / return) with reference to the flags one by one at its first step. However, in the selection method of this embodiment, the main control There is no need for the CPU 72 to call each process one by one.

  Step S2000: In the special symbol variation pre-processing, the main control CPU 72 performs an operation of adjusting the conditions for starting the variation display of the special symbol. The specific contents of the process will be described later using another flowchart.

  Step S3000: During special symbol variation processing, the main control CPU 72 performs drive control of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 while counting the variation timer. Specifically, a drive signal (1 byte data) of ON or OFF is output to each segment and dot (No. 0 to No. 7) of the 7-segment LED. The pattern of the drive signal changes with the passage of time, whereby the variation display of the special symbol is performed.

  Step S4000: In the special symbol stop display processing, the main control CPU 72 performs drive control of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Similarly, although the drive signal of ON or OFF is output with respect to each segment and dot of 7 segment LED, the pattern of a drive signal is constant and, thereby, stop display of a special symbol is performed.

  Step S5000: The variable winning device management process is selected when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the big hit or small hit mode (a mode other than non-winning) in the above-described special symbol stop display processing. In addition, a big hit game or a small hit game is started according to the mode by which the stop display of the special symbol is displayed.

[Big hit game]
For example, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of 15 rounds of big hit, a big hit game (special game advantageous to the player) is executed. During the jackpot game, the jump destination is set to the variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the variation display of the special symbol is not performed. In the variable winning device management process, the first big winning opening solenoid 90 is excited for a predetermined time (for example, until 29 seconds or until 10 winnings have been counted) for a preset number of continuous operations (for example, 15 times). Thus, the first variable winning device 30 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern (continuous operation of the special electric symbol). During this time, the player is given an opportunity to obtain many prize balls collectively by making the game balls be concentrated on the first variable winning device 30 intensively (special game execution means). Note that the opening and closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 at the time of a big hit is referred to as "round", and when the number of continuous operations is 15 times in all, these may be generically referred to as "15 round". In the present embodiment, a plurality of winning types (winning symbols) are provided in the 15 round big hit. In addition to 15 rounds as a jackpot type, a plurality of other 4 rounds and 2 rounds may be provided.

  Further, when the main control CPU 72 sets a large winning opening opening pattern (the number of rounds, the number of opening and closing operations per round, opening time, etc.) in the variable winning device management process, opening and closing of the first variable winning device 30 for one round Every time the operation is ended, the value of the round number counter is incremented by one. The value of the round number counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76, for example, with an initial value of 0. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a round number command representing the value of the round number counter. The number-of-rounds command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 11). When the value of the round number counter reaches the set number of continuous operations, the main control CPU 72 ends the big hit game (major) in that round.

  Then, when the big hit game is ended, the main control CPU 72 changes the state (short time state) after the end of the big hit game based on the game state flag (time shortening function operation flag) (time shortening state transition means). In the "time reduction state", the time shortening function is activated, and the lottery probability of the operation lottery of the normal symbol is set from the normal probability (low probability) to the high probability, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened and variable start winning The opening time of the device 28 is extended and the number of times of opening is increased (a so-called electric support is performed).

[Small hit]
Further, in the present embodiment, a small hit is provided as a winning type other than the non-winning. When the small hit is won, a small hit game is performed separately from the big hit game, and the second variable winning device 31 opens and closes (special game execution means). For example, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a small hit, a small hit game (special game advantageous to the player) is executed. During the small hit game, the jump destination is set to the variable winning device management processing in the previous execution selection processing (step S1000), and the variation display of the special symbol is not performed. In the variable winning device management process, for a predetermined time (for example, until 1.8 seconds or 10 winnings are counted), the second big winning opening solenoid 97 for a predetermined number of operations (for example, once or a plurality of times) The second variable winning device 31 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern (operation of the special electric symbol). During this time, the player is given an opportunity to obtain a certain amount of winning balls by making the game balls be concentrated on the second variable winning device 31 intensively (special game executing means).

  In addition, in the variable winning device management process during the small hit game, the specific area solenoid 99 is excited for a predetermined time (for example, 1.6 seconds) for a predetermined number of times of operation (for example, once). The slide member 31c opens and closes in a predetermined pattern. Passing the game ball to the specific area 31x during this time gives the player an opportunity to start a big hit game. That is, whether or not to start the big hit game in the variable winning device management process is determined depending on whether the game ball passes the specific area 31x during the small hit game. In this embodiment, a plurality of winning types (winning symbols) are provided in the small hit, and when the gaming ball passes the specific area 31x, a big hit game according to the winning type is started.

  In addition, even if the game ball does not pass through the specific area 31x and the small hit game is over, the "time reduction function" is not activated, so the benefit to shift to the "time reduction state" is not granted (therefore It does not become a precondition of (except when the upper limit has been reached).

[Multiple winning types]
In the present embodiment, “16 round big hit” is provided in addition to the above “15 round big hit” as the plurality of winning types. "15 round big hit" is started when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the big hit mode, "16 round big hit" is stopped and displayed in the small hit mode the special symbol and the game ball during the small hit game Is started when it passes the specific area 31x. The operation of the second variable winning device 31 corresponds to the first round of the 16 round big hits, and the operation of the first variable winning device 30 corresponds to the remaining 15 rounds. However, in the present embodiment, jackpots other than 16 rounds and 15 rounds may be provided.

  The above-mentioned winning type corresponds to the type of the first special symbol or the second special symbol which is displayed stopped when winning. For example, "15 round big hit" corresponds to the big hit of "first winning symbol"-"third winning symbol", and "16 round big hit" is a small hit of "fourth winning symbol"-"six winning symbol" ( Corresponding to the specific area 31x). Therefore, in the following, the "winning type" will be appropriately referred to as the "winning symbol".

[First winning symbol]
In the special symbol stop display processing, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of "first winning symbol", a big hit game is executed (special game execution means). In this case, the first large winning opening 30b is opened one time each from the first round over a sufficiently long time (for example, the maximum opening time of 29.0 seconds), and this continues until the fifth round. From the sixth round to the fifteenth round (final round), the opening of the first large winning opening 30b is performed once for a short time (for example, a maximum opening time of 0.2 seconds). For this reason, the jackpot game of the “first winning symbol” is a jackpot game in which it is possible to provide the player with five rounds of balls (prize balls). In addition, the first large winning opening 30b is closed without waiting for the longest opening time, if a prescribed number of times (for example, 10 times = 10 gaming balls) of winnings occur in one round (the same applies hereinafter) . In addition, when it corresponds to the "first winning symbol" in the "non-time shortening state", it shifts to the "non-time shortening state" even after the end of the big hit game, but the "first winning symbol" in the "time shortening state" When it corresponds to ", it will shift to a" time shortening state "by operating the" time shortening function "after the end of the big hit game.

[Second winning symbol]
In the special symbol stop display processing, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of the "second winning symbol", a big hit game is executed (special game execution means). In this case, the first large winning opening 30b is opened one time each from the first round over a sufficiently long time (for example, the maximum opening time of 29.0 seconds), and this continues until the fifth round. From the sixth round to the fifteenth round (final round), the opening of the first large winning opening 30b is performed once for a short time (for example, a maximum opening time of 0.2 seconds). For this reason, the jackpot game of the “second winning symbol” is a jackpot game in which it is possible to give the player the balls (prize balls) for five rounds. Then, by activating the "time reduction function" after the end of the big hit game, it shifts to the "time reduction state".

[Third winning symbol]
In the special symbol stop display processing, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of the “third winning symbol”, a big hit game is executed (special game execution means). In this case, the first large winning opening 30b is opened one time each from the first round over a sufficiently long time (for example, the maximum opening time of 29.0 seconds), and this continues until the fifteenth round. For this reason, the jackpot game of the “third winning symbol” is a jackpot game in which it is possible to give the player a payout of 15 rounds (prize balls). Then, by activating the "time reduction function" after the end of the big hit game, it shifts to the "time reduction state".

[Fourth winning symbol]
In the special symbol stop display process, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of “the fourth winning symbol”, the small hit game is executed, and when the gaming ball passes the specific area 31x during the small hit game, Transition from the small hit gaming state to the big hit gaming state. In this case, the first large winning opening 30b is opened one time each from the second round over a sufficiently long time (for example, the maximum opening time of 29.0 seconds), and this continues until the sixth round. From the seventh round to the sixteenth round (final round), the opening of the first large winning opening 30b is performed once for a short time (for example, a maximum opening time of 0.2 seconds). For this reason, in the big hit game when it corresponds to the "fourth winning symbol", it is possible to give the player the balls for five rounds (prize balls). Then, by activating the "time reduction function" after the end of the big hit game, it shifts to the "time reduction state".

[The fifth winning symbol]
In the special symbol stop display process, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of the “fifth winning symbol”, the small hit game is executed, and when the gaming ball passes the specific area 31x during the small hit game, Transition from the small hit gaming state to the big hit gaming state. In this case, the first large winning opening 30b is opened one time each from the second round over a sufficiently long time (for example, the maximum opening time of 29.0 seconds), and this continues until the eleventh round. From the 12th round to the 16th round (final round), the opening of the first large winning opening 30b is performed once for a short time (for example, the maximum opening time of 0.2 seconds). For this reason, in the jackpot game when it corresponds to the "fifth winning symbol", it is possible to give the player a payout of 10 rounds (prize balls). Then, by activating the "time reduction function" after the end of the big hit game, it shifts to the "time reduction state".

[The sixth winning symbol]
In the special symbol stop display process, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of “sixth winning symbol”, a small hit game is executed, and when the gaming ball passes the specific area 31x during the small hit game, Transition from the small hit gaming state to the big hit gaming state. In this case, the first large winning opening 30b is opened one time each from the second round over a sufficiently long time (for example, the maximum opening time of 29.0 seconds), and this continues until the sixteenth round. For this reason, in the big hit game when it corresponds to the "sixth winning symbol", it is possible to give the player the balls for 15 rounds (prize balls). Then, by activating the "time reduction function" after the end of the big hit game, it shifts to the "time reduction state".

In any case, if it corresponds to the "first winning symbol" in the "non-time shortening status", it shifts to the "non-time shortening status" after the big hit game is over, and the "second winning symbol" or the "third winning symbol" If it corresponds to, it will shift to "time saving state" after the big hit game is over.
In addition, in the "time reduction state", if it corresponds to the "first winning symbol", the "second winning symbol" or the "third winning symbol", it shifts to the "time reduction state" after the end of the big hit game.

  Furthermore, regardless of whether it is a "non-time shortening state" or a "time shortening state", when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game and the big hit game is started, the winning symbol is "No. Even if it is any of 4 winning symbols "-" 6th winning symbol ", it shifts to" time shortening state "after the end of the big hit game.

  In this way, when the small lottery is won in the internal lottery in this way and the gaming ball passes the specific area during the small hitting game, the big hit game is executed, and after the big hit game ends, it shifts to the time saving state according to the kind of winning symbol. The gaming machine is called a so-called one-type / two-type mixed type gaming machine.

[Special symbol change pretreatment]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the special symbol variation pre-processing. Each step will be described below.

  Step S2100: First, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the first special symbol operation memory number or the second special symbol operation memory number remains (is larger than 0). This confirmation can be performed with reference to the value of the operation memory number counter stored in the RAM 76. If the number of operation memories of both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the demonstration setting process of step S2500.

  Step S2500: In this processing, the main control CPU 72 generates a command for demonstration effect. The demonstration effect command is output to the effect control device 124 in the above-described effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 11). When the demonstration setting process is executed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. At the time of recovery, the end address is recovered as described above (the same applies to the following).

  On the other hand, if the value of the operation memory number counter of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is greater than 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2200.

  Step S2200: The main control CPU 72 executes special symbol storage area shift processing (second lottery priority execution means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 preferentially reads out the one corresponding to the second special symbol among the random numbers for lottery (big hit determination random number, big hit symbol random number, etc.) stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76 (so-called priority digestion). At this time, if random numbers are stored in two or more sections (only the first special symbol applies), the main control CPU 72 reads out the random numbers sequentially from the top section and erases (consumes) the remaining random numbers 1 Move to the previous section one by one. The read random number is stored, for example, in another temporary storage area. When the random number corresponding to the second special symbol is not stored, the main control CPU 72 reads the random number corresponding to the first special symbol and stores it in the temporary storage area. Each random number stored in the temporary storage area is used for the internal lottery in the next jackpot determination process. As a result, in this embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially performed over the first special symbol. Note that the program may be a program in which random numbers are read out in the order simply stored without providing such a priority order by special symbol. Further, in this process, the main control CPU 72 subtracts one from the value of the operation memory number counter (one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, which has been shifted the random number) stored in the RAM 76 and subtracts it. The later value is set to "the number of working memories at the start of fluctuation". Thereby, the display mode of the number of memories by the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a or the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a changes (1 decrease) in the above-mentioned display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 11) . When the procedure up to this point is completed, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2300.

[Special symbol storage area shift process]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the above-mentioned special symbol storage area shift process. When the value of the operation memory counter corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is larger than “0” in the previous special symbol fluctuation pre-processing (step S2100 in FIG. 17: Yes), the main control CPU 72 Executes this special symbol storage area shift process. Each step will be described below.

  Step S2210: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the operation memory corresponding to the second special symbol remains. This confirmation can be performed with reference to the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter stored in the RAM 76. If the value of the operation memory number counter corresponding to the second special symbol is 1 or more (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S2212.

  Step S2212: The main control CPU 72 designates the second special symbol as the special symbol to be shifted in the storage area. This designation is performed, for example, by setting "02H" as a target symbol designation value.

  Step S2214: On the other hand, when the value of the operation memory number counter corresponding to the second special symbol is 0 (step S2210: No), the main control CPU 72 designates the first special symbol as the special symbol to be shifted the storage area Do. The designation in this case is performed, for example, by setting "01H" as a target symbol designation value.

  Step S2216: The main control CPU 72 shifts the random number storage area of the RAM 76 for the special symbol of the target designated in either step S2212 or step S2214 above. In addition, about the content of a specific process, it is as having already stated in the previous special symbol change pre-processing.

  Step S2217a: Here, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the flag of “the number of pre-winning operation memory storages 0” is set for the target special symbol. Specifically, whether or not a flag corresponding to "the first special symbol winning pre-operation memory number = 0" or "the second special symbol pre-winning number operation memory number = 0" is currently set in the storage area of the RAM 76 Confirm. Therefore, if the change target is the first special symbol, the flag of "first special symbol change pre-operation memory number = 0" is confirmed, and if the change target is the second special symbol "second special symbol change pre-operation memory The flag of "number = 0" is checked. If the flag corresponding to the target special symbol is set (Yes), the main control CPU72 executes step S2217b, and if the flag is not set (No), the main control CPU72 executes step S2217c.

[In the case of fluctuation from working memory number before winning = 0]
Step S2217 b: In this case, the main control CPU 72 sets “0” as the number of pre-variation operation memories of the target special symbol, and resets the previous flag. Therefore, the value set here is only "0".

[In the case of fluctuation from other than the working memory number before winning = 0]
Step S2217c: On the other hand, when the previous flag is not set, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the current working memory number counter for the target special symbol and sets the same value as the "pre-variation working memory number". Therefore, the value set here is one of “1” to “4”.

  Step S2218: Next, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the operation storage counter for the special symbol of interest. For example, if the target for shifting the storage area this time is the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 subtracts (−1) the value of the operation storage counter corresponding to the second special symbol. Here, even if the value of the operation memory counter is subtracted, since the main control CPU 72 has already set the value of the "number of operation memory before winning", no problem occurs in the subsequent processing.

  Step S 2220: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets “the change start operation memory number” from the value of the operation memory counter after subtraction. Here, the value of the operation memory counter may be added to both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and then the “number of operation memories at start of fluctuation” may be set.

Step S2222: In addition, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the special symbol to be shifted in the present memory area is the second special symbol.
Step S2224: When the target is the second special symbol (step S2222: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets an effect memory number reduction effect command for the second special symbol. The effect command set here is also generated as a command of 1 word length, but the configuration is in contrast to the above-mentioned "effect memory number increase effect command". That is, the effect memory number reduction effect command has a lower byte value (for example, "00H" to "03H" for indicating the number of action memories after reduction with respect to the leading value (for example, "BCH") for the upper byte indicating the command type. “), And the value of the lower byte is obtained by further adding (ORing) an addition value (eg,“ 10H ”) which means“ a decrease in the number of working memories accompanying consumption ”. Therefore, for the low-order byte, the second digit is "1" by ORing the addition value "10H", and this value indicates that "result (change information) due to decrease in the number of working memories" It becomes a thing. In other words, if the lower byte of the command is "13H", the number of working memories "4" (command notation "14H") up to the previous time is reduced by one, and the current working memory number is "3" (command The notation shows that it became "13H". Similarly, if the lower byte is "12H" to "10H", the result is that the working memory numbers "3" to "1" (command notation "13H" to "11H") until the previous time decrease by one respectively The present operating memory number indicates that "2" to "0" (command notation is "12H" to "10H"). In addition, said leading value "BCH" is a value showing that this presentation command is an operation memory number command about the 2nd special symbol.

  Step S2226: If the target of this time is the first special symbol (step S2222: No), the main control CPU 72 sets the effect memory number reduction effect command for the first special symbol. The command in this case is the same as the above except that the leading value is a value (for example, "BBH") indicating that the preceding value is an operation memory number command for the first special symbol.

Step S2228: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes an effect command output process. This processing is for transmitting to the effect control device 124 the operation memory number reduction effect command set in the previous step S2224 or step S2226 (memory number notification means).
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol variation pre-processing (FIG. 17).

[See Fig. 17: Special symbol variation pre-processing]
Step S2300: The main control CPU 72 executes a jackpot determination process (internal lottery). In this process, the main control CPU 72 first sets the range of the jackpot value, and determines whether or not the read random number value is included in this range (first lottery execution means, second lottery execution means, lottery execution means). If the random number value read out at this time is included in the range of the big hit value, the main control CPU 72 sets the big hit flag (01H), and proceeds to step S2400.

  If the above big hit flag is not set, the main control CPU 72 sets the range of the small hit value next in the same big hit determination processing, and determines whether or not the read random value is included in this range (first Lottery execution means, second lottery execution means). The "small hit" referred to here is something other than the non-election (loss), but is different from the "big hit". That is, although the "big hit" generates an opportunity (the turning point of the game) to shift to the above-mentioned "time reduction state", the "small hit" does not generate such an opportunity. The "small hit" is positioned as the condition for operating only the second variable winning device 31 (the condition for operating the condition device is not satisfied). Furthermore, when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the "small hit", it is positioned as a "big hit" (a condition for operating the condition device). In any case, if the read random number is included in the range of the small hit value, the main control CPU 72 sets the small hit flag, and the process proceeds to step S2400. As described above, in the present embodiment, the range of the big hit value and the small hit value is defined in advance as a hit range other than the non-winning, according to the program. It is also possible to write each in the ROM 74, read it out, and make a big hit judgment while comparing it with a random number value.

  In the present embodiment, in the first special symbol lottery, the winning probability of the big hit is set to 1/224, and the small hit is set not to be won. In the second special symbol lottery, the probability of winning a big hit is set to 1/224, and the probability of winning a small hit is set to 1⁄4. Therefore, in the second special symbol lottery, it is easier to win a small hit than a big hit. The main control CPU 72 sets the range of the big hit value and the range of the small hit value to be compared with the read random number value in order to satisfy the winning probability of the big hit and the winning probability of the small hit.

  Step S2400: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the value (01H) is set in the big hit flag in the previous big hit determination processing. If the value (01H) is not set in the jackpot flag (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2402.

  Step S2402: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the value (01H) is set in the small hit flag in the previous big hit determination process. If the value (01H) is not set in the small hit flag (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2404. The main control CPU 72 may determine the big hit (for example, set 01H) or the small hit (for example, set 0AH) according to the value of the common hit flag without preparing the big hit flag and the small hit flag separately.

  Step S2404: The main control CPU 72 executes stop symbol determination processing upon release. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets stop symbol number data at the time of release by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of removal) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. These commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 11).

  In addition, in this embodiment, since 7 segment LED is used for the 1st special symbol display 34 and the 2nd special symbol display 35, for example, the display mode of the stop symbol at the time of detachment is always one segment (the center) It is possible to fix the stop symbol number data to one value (for example, 64H), leaving only the lighting display of the bar "-"). In this case, the storage capacity used on the program can be reduced, the processing load on the main control CPU 72 can be reduced, and the processing speed can be improved.

  Step S2405: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes out-of-time variation pattern determination processing with reference to the variation pattern selection table (variation pattern definition means) (variation pattern determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines a variation pattern number at the time of disconnection for a special symbol (variation pattern selection means). The fluctuation pattern number distinguishes the type (pattern) of the fluctuation display of the special symbol or corresponds to the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display. The fluctuation patterns include various fluctuation patterns such as normal fluctuation (non-reach fluctuation), reach fluctuation, super reach fluctuation, etc. (the same applies to a big hit and a small hit). In addition, the information regarding the variation pattern of the selected special symbol is transmitted to the effect control device as a variation pattern command including the information as to whether or not it is a special variation (the same applies to a big hit time and a small hit time). ).

  Here, since the fluctuation time at the time of departure differs depending on whether or not the above-mentioned "time reduction state", in this processing, the main control CPU 72 loads the gaming state flag, and the current state is "time reduction Check if it is a state. Moreover, even if it is not a "time reduction state", the fluctuation time at the time of losing is set, for example, to "the variable display start operation memory number (0 to 3)" set at step S2200 except when performing fluctuation to execute reach effect. (For example, the number of operation memories at start of fluctuation display 0 → about 12.5 seconds, The number of operation memories at start of fluctuation display 1 → about 8 seconds, the number of operation memories at fluctuation display start) 2 pieces → 5 seconds, fluctuation display start operation memory number 3 pieces → about 2.5 seconds). In addition, the stop display time of the symbol at the time of detachment is constant (for example, about 0.5 seconds) regardless of the variation pattern. Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined fluctuation time (at the time of removal) in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time at the time of disconnection in the stop symbol display timer.

  The above steps S2404 and S2405 are the control procedures when the big hit determination result is out (other than non-winning), but the determination result is big hit (step S2400: Yes) or small hit (step S2402: Yes) The main control CPU 72 executes the following procedure. First, the case of the big hit will be described.

  Step S2410: The main control CPU 72 executes jackpot stop symbol determination processing (winning type determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the current winning symbol (big hit stop symbol number) according to the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) based on the jackpot symbol random number. The relationship between the jackpot symbol random number value and the type of winning symbol is previously defined in the special symbol determination data table (winning type specifying means). Therefore, the main control CPU 72 can refer to the big hit stop symbol selection table in the big hit stop symbol determination process, and can determine the type of the winning symbol from the stored contents based on the big hit symbol random number.

[Winning symbol at the time of big hit]
In this embodiment, three types of winning symbols are prepared as the winning symbols selectively determined at the time of the big hit. The breakdown of the first winning symbol is the "first winning symbol" or the "second winning symbol", and the breakdown of the second winning symbol is only the "third winning symbol". In addition, each winning symbol of these winning symbols may further include a plurality of winning symbols. For example, in the case of the "first winning symbol", the conditions are "first winning symbol A", "first winning symbol B", "first winning symbol C", and so on.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the selection ratio of the winning symbols selected at the time of big hit of the internal lottery corresponding to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is different. Therefore, the main control CPU 72 distinguishes the winning symbols to be selected depending on whether the result of the current big hit corresponds to the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

[First special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table]
FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a configuration row of the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. When the result of the current big hit corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol with reference to the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table (winning type specifying means).

  In the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the left column shows the distribution value according to the winning symbol, and each distribution value “50”, “50” is the ratio when the denominator is 100. Equivalent to. In the second column from the left, "first winning symbol" and "second winning symbol" corresponding to each distribution value are shown. That is, at the time of big hit corresponding to the first special symbol, the ratio that "the first winning symbol" is selected is 50/100 (= 50%), and the ratio that "the second winning symbol" is selected is 100 minutes. Of 50 (= 50%). The size of each distribution value corresponds to the selection ratio for each winning symbol using the jackpot symbol random number. Here, the "first winning symbol" corresponds to the "first winning type", and the "second winning symbol" to the "six winning symbol" correspond to the "second winning type".

  In any case, when the result of the current big hit corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs selection lottery based on the big hit symbol random number, and the selection ratio shown in the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table Select the winning symbol selectively. Further, in the first special symbol big hit time stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as a stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. The stop symbol command is described, for example, by a combination of MODE value-EVENT value, and among these, the MODE value "B1H" of the upper byte is that the winning symbol of this time is selected at the big hit of the first special symbol. Represents Further, the lower byte EVENT values "01H" and "02H" respectively indicate the types of the corresponding winning symbols in the selection table. Therefore, for example, when the result of the current big hit corresponds to the first special symbol and the "first winning symbol" is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command at the time of winning is described by "B1H01H" It will be.

  As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects a winning symbol from the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, it generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to, for example, the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines the jackpot stop symbol number for the first special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Time reduction number and special variation number]
In the two columns on the right side of the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the values of the number of time-savings and the number of special variations given after the end of the big hit game are shown. In the present embodiment, the time reduction number is not given if the symbol corresponds to the “first winning symbol” (in the non-time-shortened state) during the normal operation. On the other hand, if it corresponds to the "first winning symbol" during the short time (in the time reduction state), the time reduction number is given four times (or eight times).

  In addition, when it corresponds to the “second winning symbol”, regardless of whether it is normal or time-saving, the time-saving number is given four times (or eight times). The number of times of time saving is not limited to the above value, and may be 1 to 3 times, or 5 times or more (9 times or more).

  Here, “four times (or eight times)” means that the total number of changes of the second special symbol is four times, or the total number of changes of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is eight times. It means that the shortening state ends.

When it corresponds to the "first winning symbol" (in a non-time-shortened state) during normal times, the number of special variation is not given. On the other hand, when it corresponds to the "first winning symbol" during the short time (in the time shortening state), the special fluctuation number is given eight times.
In addition, when it corresponds to the “second winning symbol”, the number of times of special variation is given eight times regardless of whether it is medium or short. The number of times of special variation may be set to “0” when the time reduction state ends. The number of times of special variation is not limited to the above value, and may be 1 to 7 times, or 9 or more times (the same applies hereinafter).

[Second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table]
FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a configuration row of the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. When the result of the current big hit corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol with reference to the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table (winning type specifying means).

  Also in the second special symbol big hit time stop symbol selection table, the distribution value according to the winning symbol is shown in the left column, and each distribution value “100” corresponds to the ratio when the denominator is 100. . Similarly, in the second column from the left, "third winning symbol" corresponding to each distribution value is shown. That is, at the time of the big hit corresponding to the second special symbol, the rate at which the "third winning symbol" is selected is 100/100 (= 100%).

  If the result of the current big hit corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU72 performs the selection lottery based on the big hit symbol random number, and selects the winning symbol with the selection ratio shown in the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table To decide. Similarly, as shown in the third column from the left in the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as a stop symbol command at the time of winning. Here too, the stop symbol command is described by the combination of the above-mentioned MODE value-EVENT value, and among these, the MODE value "B2H" of the upper byte is selected when the winning symbol of this time is the big hit of the second special symbol It represents that it is. Further, the lower byte EVENT value “01H” indicates the type of the corresponding winning symbol in the selection table. Therefore, for example, when the result of the present big hit corresponds to the second special symbol and the "third winning symbol" is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command will be described by "B2H01H". .

  As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects a winning symbol from the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, it generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to, for example, the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines a jackpot stop symbol number for the second special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Time reduction number and special variation number]
In the two columns on the right side of the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the values of the number of time-savings and the number of special fluctuations given after the end of the jackpot game are shown. In the present embodiment, when it corresponds to the “third winning symbol”, the number of time saving is given four times (or eight times) regardless of whether it is medium or short.
In addition, when it corresponds to the “third winning symbol”, the number of times of special fluctuation is given eight times regardless of whether it is medium or time normally.

[See Fig. 17: Special symbol variation pre-processing]
Step S 2412: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination process with reference to the fluctuation pattern selection table (variation pattern defining means) (variation pattern determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined fluctuation time in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time in the stop symbol display timer. In the case of a big hit reach fluctuation, a fluctuation time longer than the time of departure is generally determined.

  Step S2414: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a big hit and other setting process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets the flag area of the RAM 76 when the type of the winning symbol determined in the previous step S2410 (big hit stop symbol number) is "second winning symbol" or "third winning symbol". The time shortening function operation flag as a certain gaming state flag is set to ON (01H) (time shortening state transition means, time shortening function operation means). When the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the “first winning symbol” in the non-time shortening state, the main control CPU 72 resets the time shortening function activation flag to OFF (00H), and corresponds to the “first winning symbol” in the time shortening state. In the case, the value of the time shortening function activation flag is set to ON (01H).

  Further, in the process of step S 2414, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (big hit symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the big hit stop symbol number. In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a lottery result command (at the time of big hit) together with the above-mentioned stop symbol command (at the time of big hit). The stop symbol command and the lottery result command are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Next, the small hit process will be described.
Step S2407: The main control CPU 72 executes small hit time stop symbol determination processing (winning type determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type (small hit time stop symbol number) of the winning symbol at the small hit based on the big hit symbol random number. Here as well, the relationship between the big hit symbol random number value and the type of win symbol at the time of small hit is previously defined in the small hit stop symbol selection table (win type specifying means). In the present embodiment, in order to reduce the load on the main control CPU 72, the winning symbol for the small hit is determined using the big hit symbol random number, but a dedicated dedicated random number may be used. Also, in the present embodiment, no small hit is set for the first special symbol, but only for the second special symbol.

[Winning symbol at the time of small hit]
In this embodiment, three kinds of winning symbols are prepared as the winning symbols selectively determined at the time of the small hit. The breakdown of the three types is "fourth winning symbol", "fifth winning symbol", and "six winning symbol". These winning symbols may further include a plurality of winning symbols. For example, in the case of the "fourth winning symbol", the "fourth winning symbol A", the "fourth winning symbol B", the "fourth winning symbol C", and so on.

[Second special symbol small hit time stop symbol selection table]
FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a configuration row of the second special symbol small hit time stop symbol selection table. The main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol with reference to the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means).

  Also in the second special symbol small hit time stop symbol selection table, the distribution value according to the winning symbol is shown in the left column, and each distribution value "33", "33", "34" is the denominator This corresponds to the ratio of 100. Similarly, in the second column from the left, "fourth winning symbol", "fifth winning symbol", and "sixth winning symbol" corresponding to each distribution value are shown. That is, at the time of the small hit corresponding to the second special symbol, the ratio at which the "fourth winning symbol" is selected is 33/100 (= 33%), and the ratio at which the "fifth winning symbol" is selected Is 33/100 (= 33%), and the rate at which the "sixth winning symbol" is selected is 34/100 (= 34%).

  As a result of the small hit this time, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the big hit symbol random number, and selectively determines the winning symbol according to the selection ratio shown in the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table. In the second special symbol small hit time stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as a stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. Here too, the stop symbol command is described by the combination of the above-mentioned MODE value-EVENT value, and among these, the MODE value "B2H" of the upper byte is selected when the current winning symbol is a small hit of the second special symbol. It represents that it is a thing. The lower byte EVENT values "02H", "03H", and "04H" respectively indicate the types of corresponding winning symbols in the selection table. Therefore, for example, when the "fourth winning symbol" is selected as the winning symbol as a result of the small hit of this time, the stop symbol command is described by "B2H02H".

  As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects a winning symbol from the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table, it generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to, for example, the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines a small hitting stop symbol number for the second special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Time reduction number and special variation number]
In the two columns on the right side of the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table, the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game and the big hit game is started, and it is awarded after the big hit game is over The values of the number of times of short and the number of times of special variation are shown. In this embodiment, when it corresponds to the "fourth winning symbol", the "fifth winning symbol", or the "six winning symbol", the number of time saving is four times (or eight, regardless of whether it is in the middle or the hour). Times) granted.
In addition, it corresponds to "the fourth winning symbol", "the fifth winning symbol" or "the sixth winning symbol", and when the game ball passes the specific area 31x and the big hit game is executed during the small hit game, it is normal. The special fluctuation number is given eight times regardless of whether it is medium or short.

  By using the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, and the second special symbol small hit when stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU72, non-time shortening state ( When it corresponds to the “first winning symbol (first winning type)” in the predetermined gaming state), the transition condition (predetermined transition condition) to the time shortening state is not satisfied, and the “first When it corresponds to the winning symbol, the transition condition to the time shortening state shall be satisfied, and in the non-time shortening state or the time shortening state, the second winning symbol to the sixth winning symbol (second winning type) When it corresponds (only if the big hit game is executed for the 4th winning symbol ~ the 6th winning symbol), the transition condition to the time shortening state can be satisfied (transition condition setting means )

[See Fig. 17: Special symbol variation pre-processing]
Step S2408: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes small hit time fluctuation pattern determination processing with reference to the fluctuation pattern selection table (variation pattern defining means) (variation pattern determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200 (variation pattern selection means). Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined fluctuation time in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time in the stop symbol display timer. In the present embodiment, the small hit is set only in the second special symbol lottery, and in the small hit, a variation pattern having a variation time for the small hit is selected. A small hit may be set in the first special symbol lottery.

  Step S2409: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes small hit and other setting processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (small hit symbol) by the second special symbol display device 35 based on the small hit stop symbol number. In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of a small hit) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. The stop symbol command and the lottery result command are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  Step S2415: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes special symbol variation start processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 selects the variation pattern data based on the variation pattern number (at the time of failure / at the time of hit). At the same time, the main control CPU 72 sets a variation start flag of the special symbol in the flag area of the RAM 76. Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a change start command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. This fluctuation start command is also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol changing process (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and returns to the special symbol game process.

[FIG. 16: Special symbol change processing, special symbol stop display processing]
In special symbol variation processing, as described above, the main control CPU72 loads the value of the variation timer from the register to the timer counter, and then the timer according to the passage of time (count number of clock pulses or value of interrupt counter) Decrement the counter value. Then, the main control CPU 72 controls the variation display of the special symbol as described above until the value becomes 0 while referring to the value of the timer counter. Then, when the value of the timer counter becomes 0, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol stop display process (step S4000) as the next jump destination.

  Further, in the special symbol stop display processing, the main control CPU 72 controls the stop display of the special symbol based on the stop symbol determined in the stop symbol determination processing (step S2404, step S2407, step S2410 in FIG. 17). Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. The symbol stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above. In the special symbol stop display processing, when the stop symbol is displayed for a predetermined time, the main control CPU 72 deletes the flag during flag variation.

[Time-of-day variation pattern determination processing]
FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the above-mentioned out-of-time variation pattern determination process. Hereinafter, description will be made along the procedure example.

  Step S4250: Here, first, the main control CPU 72 sets a reach group selection offset value from the pre-change operation memory number. The reach group selection offset value is a value for determining a large classification (large category) of the variation pattern table. In the present embodiment, since the "pre-change operation memory number" is set from the "first special symbol prize pre-operation memory number" or the "second special symbol prize pre-operation memory number", as a result before the start of the change The value of the working memory number counter of the target special symbol will be reflected in the reach group selection offset value. Note that the set of reach group selection offset values will be described later using another drawing.

  Step S2451: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the reach group selection table using the offset value selected in the previous step S2450. The reach group selection table is a table that performs category lottery of a fluctuation pattern by using, among the three random numbers (reach group determination random number, reach mode determination random number and fluctuation pattern determination random number) related to the determination of fluctuation pattern, in particular, reach group determination random number. is there. The category lottery using the reach group selection table will be described later using another drawing.

  Step S2452: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads a reach group determination random number among the various change random numbers shifted in the special symbol storage area shift process (step S2200 in FIG. 17).

  Step S2454: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes an out-of-time fluctuation pattern determination first process. In this process, category lottery (variation of reach type) of variation patterns is performed using the loaded reach group determination random number, and the selected offset is set as a return value, and the return value set here is the reach It becomes a mode selection offset. In addition, the content of a specific process is later mentioned with the structural example of a reach group selection table.

  Step S2456: The main control CPU 72 sets the reach mode selection table using the reach mode selection offset which is the previous return value. The reach mode selection table set here is used for the selection lottery using the reach mode determination random number as an argument in the next step.

Step S2458: In order to perform the above selection lottery, the main control CPU 72 loads a reach mode determination random number.
Step S2460: The main control CPU 72 executes the second variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 selects a corresponding fluctuation mode offset from the above reach mode selection table based on the reach mode determination random number, and sets the result as a return value. The variation mode offset selected here corresponds to one of the components of the variation pattern (first half variation pattern), and the variation mode offset (first half variation pattern) is the final stage variation pattern (second half variation combined with the first half variation pattern) The address of the variation pattern selection table used in the lottery to determine the pattern) is designated. Therefore, here, by selecting the fluctuation mode offset, it is decided to determine part of the components used to determine the fluctuation pattern. That is, in the present embodiment, one fluctuation pattern is determined from a combination of a plurality of constituent elements, and the “first half fluctuation pattern” and the “second half fluctuation pattern” are used as the constituent elements. Therefore, the value of the fluctuation mode offset performed here corresponds to the selection result of the “first half fluctuation pattern”. The “first half fluctuation pattern” and the “second half fluctuation pattern” will be further described later.

  Step S2462: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets a fluctuation pattern selection table using the fluctuation mode offset value which is the return value. Specifically, the table address indicated by the value of the fluctuation mode offset (for example, the first half fluctuation pattern number) is specified on the ROM 74 as described above.

Step S2464: When the table address is designated, the main control CPU 72 loads the variation pattern determination random number which is the last random number.
Step S2466: The main control CPU 72 executes the third variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 selects a corresponding second half variation pattern number from the above variation pattern selection table based on the variation pattern determination random number. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the selected latter half fluctuation pattern number as a return value. By combining the second-half fluctuation pattern number selected here with the first-half fluctuation pattern number, a unique fluctuation pattern (first-half fluctuation pattern and second-half fluctuation pattern that is finally performed by the fluctuation) is selected. The occurrence of advance notice, the time until tempering, the reach mode, the reach change time, and the change mode until the final stop indication are determined, and the total change time (the change) in the change from the combination of the first half change pattern number and the change pattern number The number of seconds) will be determined uniquely.

  Step S2467: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes stop display determination time determination processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the determination time at the time of the stop display according to the determined fluctuation pattern (combination of the first half fluctuation pattern and the second half fluctuation pattern). The specific contents of the process will be described later using another flowchart.

  Step S2468: Finally, the main control CPU 72 generates a variation pattern command from the combination of the selected first half variation pattern number and the second half variation pattern number (“first half variation pattern number” + “second half variation pattern number”). The generated variation pattern command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 11). Then, the effect control device 124 grasps the fluctuation pattern information (the first half fluctuation pattern number and the second half fluctuation pattern number) of the fluctuation from the received fluctuation pattern command, or the fluctuation production pattern (the presentation pattern corresponding to the first half fluctuation pattern, the second half The presentation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern can be selected.

[Example of Configuration of Selection Table by Operating Memory Number Before Variation] Offset Value Selection Table
FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the selection table offset value selection table by the first special symbol out-of-time change pre-change operation storage number. In this table, the reach group selection table offset value is returned with the value of "the number of first special symbol winning pre-game winning memory" saved when entering the middle start winning opening 26 (at the time of winning) as an argument. . In addition, in the processing of the main control CPU 72, in the out-of-time fluctuation pattern determination process (FIG. 22), the value of the argument is set to either "0" or "1" to "4" ing. Therefore, in the left column of the table, "0" to "4" are placed as "compared working memory numbers" as comparison values, and on the right column, the corresponding reach group selection offset values "00" to "04" It is set.

For example, the main control CPU 72 acquires the reach group selection offset value according to the following correspondence.
(1) In the case of the first special symbol change pre-operation memory count 0, the reach group selection offset value "00" is acquired.
(2) In the case of the first special symbol change pre-operation memory number 1, the reach group selection offset value "01" is acquired.
(3) In the case of the first special symbol change pre-operation memory number 2, the reach group selection offset value "02" is acquired.
(4) In the case of the 1st special symbol change pre-operation memory number 3, the reach group selection offset value "03" is acquired.
(5) In the case of the first special symbol variation pre-operation change number 4, the reach group selection offset value "04" is acquired.

  Here, in the case of the above (1), when entering the middle start winning opening 26 (at the time of winning), the number of pre-change operation memories is 0 (no change, waiting for customers) from the current change Means to be started. On the other hand, in the case of the above (2), this means that the current fluctuation is started from the state where the number of pre-change operation memories is 1, and the situation is different from the above (1). Similarly, in the case of (3) above, when entering the middle start winning opening 26 (at the time of winning), this means that the current variation is started from the state in which the pre-variation operation memory number is two, In the case of (4) above, when entering the middle start winning opening 26 (at the time of winning), this means that the present fluctuation is started from the state where the number of pre-variation operation memories is three, In the case of), when entering the middle start winning opening 26 (at the time of winning), it means that the current fluctuation is started from the state of 4 (the maximum number of memorized working memory) before the change operation memory number, It can be seen that the situation is different from the above (1).

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, during the fluctuation pattern determination process by the main control CPU 72, it is possible to individually determine the large classification (basic category) of the fluctuation pattern table to be selected according to the value of the operation memory number 0 to 4 before fluctuation. The reach group selection offset value corresponding to each value of the operation memory numbers 0 to 4 before change is set.

[Classification according to reach group selection table]
FIG. 24 is a diagram showing features (categories) of the reach group selection table selected by the value of the reach group selection offset. In FIG. 24, “reach group selection 00” to “reach group selection 04” in the left column correspond to the offset values shown in the right column of the table in FIG. Hereinafter, the features (categories) of the reach group selection table will be described.

[In case of reach group selection offset value "00"]
In the case of the first special symbol change pre-operation number 0 in the above (1), the reach group selection offset value is set to "00". The characteristic of the reach group selection table selected in this case is that the number of seconds of “normal fluctuation at the time of falling off” representative of the fluctuation pattern finally determined is 15 seconds, and the selection ratio of the reach fluctuation pattern The distribution ratio is 30%. This is that, when the first special symbol winning pre-operation memory number starts to fluctuate from the state of "0", it is that no fluctuation display is currently performed at present, and the ball is finally entered into the middle start winning opening 26 Since it is considered that it corresponds to the first change indication that occurred, setting a relatively long change time and setting the reach change occurrence ratio relatively high promotes the increase of the number of working memories during change, This is to maintain the gaming intention.

[In the case of reach group selection offset value "01"]
In the case of the first special symbol pre-variation operation memory number 1 in (2) above, the reach group selection offset value is set to “01”. The characteristic of the reach group selection table selected in this case is that the number of seconds of “normal fluctuation at the time of falling off” representative of the fluctuation pattern finally determined is 10 seconds, and the selection ratio of the reach fluctuation pattern The distribution ratio is 7%. This is that if the first special symbol winning pre-operation memory number is "1" to start the fluctuation, it will end the fluctuation display that has already been made under the current situation, consumes the operation memory and the next Because it is considered that the fluctuation display of has been started, the fluctuation time is set to a relatively medium length, and the occurrence ratio of reach fluctuation is also set to a relatively medium, thereby increasing the number of working memories during fluctuation. To a certain extent, and to maintain the gaming intention.

[In the case of reach group selection offset value "02"]
In the case of the first special symbol change pre-operation number 2 in the above (3), the reach group selection offset value is set to "02". In this case, the feature of the reach group selection table selected in this case is that the number of seconds of “normal fluctuation at the time of falling off” representative of the fluctuation pattern finally determined is shortened to 8 seconds, and selection of the reach fluctuation pattern The ratio (allocation ratio) is suppressed to 5%. If this is to start the change from the state in which the first special symbol winning pre-operation memory number is "2", it will end the change display that has already been made in the current state, the operation memory of the two It is considered that one fluctuation is consumed and one next fluctuation display is started, so the fluctuation time is set relatively short or less and the reach fluctuation occurrence ratio is also set relatively low or less This is to maintain the gaming desire while slightly promoting an increase in the number of operating memories during fluctuation.

[In the case of reach group selection offset value "03"]
In the case of the first special symbol pre-variation operation memory count 3 of the above (4), the reach group selection offset value is set to "03". In this case, the feature of the reach group selection table selected in this case is that the number of seconds of fluctuation of “normal fluctuation at the time of falling off” representative of the fluctuation pattern finally determined is further reduced to 6 seconds, and The selection ratio (allocation ratio) is suppressed to 3%. If this is to start the change from the state in which the first special symbol winning pre-operation memory number is "3", it will end the change display that has already been made in the current state, the operation memory of the three Since it is considered that one fluctuation display is started after consumption of one, the fluctuation time is shortened to a certain extent and the occurrence ratio of reach fluctuation is also set relatively low, so that the stored working memory is digested To increase the tempo of the game while maintaining the game intention.

[In the case of reach group selection offset value "04"]
In the case of the first special symbol change pre-operation number 4 in the above (5), the reach group selection offset value is set to "04". The feature of the reach group selection table selected in this case is set to 3 seconds in which the number of seconds of variation of "normal change at the time of out-of-shape" representative of the variation pattern finally determined is shortened most, and reach The selection ratio (allocation ratio) of fluctuation patterns is kept as low as 1%. If this is to start the change from the state that the first special symbol winning pre-worked working memory number is "4 (maximum)", then it has already been done in the current state of the variable display has ended, accumulated four Since it is considered that one of the operation memories is consumed and the next fluctuation display is started, the fluctuation time is set to be the shortest and the accumulated fluctuation is set by setting the occurrence rate of reach fluctuation to the lowest. This is to maintain the game intention while promoting the end of the memory to increase the tempo of the game.

[Variation pattern table of second special symbol]
The above is the contents of the first special symbol, but the variation pattern table selection of the second special symbol is as follows. That is, in this embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly performed in the non-time-shortened state (normal state), but when the time is reduced after the big hit ends, it becomes so-called right-handed state and right start winning opening 28b Entry to the ball is likely to occur, and the second special symbol's variable display is mainly performed. In this case, also for the second special symbol, the reach group selection table is selected for each of the pre-change operation memory numbers 0 to 4 separately.

As for the second special symbol, the major categories (basic categories) of the reach group selection table are roughly set to two.
[In case of reach group selection offset value "00"]
For example, in the case of the second special symbol variation pre-operation memory number 0, the reach group selection offset value is set to "00". The feature of the reach group selection table corresponding to the second special symbol selected in this case is that the variation second number of “normal variation at the time of removal” is representative of 12 as a variation pattern to be finally determined. When the second special symbol winning pre-operation memory number starts to fluctuate from the state of "0", it becomes time shortening state after the end of the big hit game, and the first entry to the right start winning opening 28b occurs Since the possibility of falling under the variable display is high, setting a relatively long fluctuation time is intended to promote an increase in the number of working memories of the second special symbol during fluctuation and to maintain the gaming will.

[In the case of reach group selection offset value "01"]
On the other hand, in the case of the second special symbol change pre-operation memory number 1, the reach group selection offset value is set to "01". The feature of the reach group selection table selected in this case is that the number of seconds of variation of “normal variation at the time of falling off” is 6 seconds as a variation pattern to be finally determined. If this is to start the change from the state that the second special symbol winning pre-operation winning memory number is "1", it has already become time reduction state at the present and the second special symbol is fluctuating, and the next It is considered that the variable memory of the second special symbol is started by consuming the memory of the second symbol, but the memory of the second special symbol may increase early because of the time-saving state. For this reason, by setting the fluctuation time to a shortened length, it is possible to promote an increase in the number of working memories during fluctuation to some extent, and to maintain the gaming will.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when determining the fluctuation pattern, first, the large classification (large category) of the fluctuation pattern table (reach group selection table) is determined according to the number of operation memories before fluctuation 0 to 4 and selected in the category The reach change and the change time which become possible are determined (the change pattern table setting means, the change pattern table determination means).

[At the time of reach group selection table]
FIG. 25 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the out-of-reach reach group selection table. The main control CPU 72 sets the reach group selection table from the previous reach group selection offset value, and acquires the reach mode selection offset value as the second stage processing. In addition, FIG. 25 is an example of the reach group selection table set in plurality, and the main control CPU 72 sets the table for each reach mode selection offset value described above.

  The “reach-at-reach-group selection table” in FIG. 25 has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “offset value” are set one byte at a time in order from the top address and stored. Here, the “comparison value” is, for example, eight stepwise different values “124”, “174”, “374”, “546”, “616”, “761”, “961”, “961”, “999 (0FFFH) Is provided, and for each “comparison value”, the reach mode selection offset “06”, “10”, “02”, “06”, “10”, “02”, as “offset value” "11" and "12" are assigned.

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the loaded reach group determination random number with the above “comparison value”, and if the value of the random number is equal to or less than the comparison value, selects an offset value corresponding to the comparison value. For example, assuming that the reach group determination random number at that time is “190”, the value of the random number exceeds the comparison value as compared to the first comparison value “124”. Compare the value of the random number with 174 ". Here again, since the value of the random number exceeds the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 further compares the next comparison value "374" with the value of the random number. Then, in this case, since the value of the random number is less than or equal to the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects the corresponding reach mode selection offset "02". Alternatively, if the reach group determination random number is “979”, the main control CPU 72 compares the third lowest comparison value “961” and then the next comparison value “961” is exceeded, so the lowermost row The reach mode selection offset "12" corresponding to the comparison value "999 (0FFFH)" of is selected.

  The offset value selected here is used to designate the condition of the reach pattern-based fluctuation pattern table selection lottery using the reach mode determination random number in the next step in the out-of-time fluctuation pattern determination process. Further, after the reach mode-based variation pattern table selection lottery (first half variation pattern selection lottery), the condition of the variation pattern determination lottery using the variation pattern determination random number at the final stage is specified. Then, from the result of the final stage fluctuation pattern determination lottery (second half fluctuation pattern selection lottery), the fluctuation pattern (combination of the first half fluctuation pattern number and the second half fluctuation pattern number) is selected at the actual start of fluctuation (at the time of the fluctuation). It has become a thing.

[Configuration example of reach mode selection table at the time of disconnection]
FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the reach mode selection table at the time of symbol distinction. Among them, (A) in FIG. 26 shows a configuration example of the reach mode selection table at the time of the first special symbol out, and (B) in FIG. 26 shows a configuration example of the reach mode selection table at the time of the second special symbol. . Although the table is simplified here for the convenience of description, a more complicated table configuration than that illustrated may be used.

  In FIG. 26A (A): This table enables selection of the first half variation pattern number using reach mode determination random numbers in the case of variation with the first special symbol (first half variation pattern table defining means). That is, "50", "110", "200" and "255 (FFH)" are defined as comparison values in the left column of the table, and "00" as the value of the variation mode selection offset corresponding to the right column. "01", "02" and "03" are defined. For example, if the reach mode determination random number loaded this time is in the range of 0 to 50, the fluctuation mode selection offset value “00” is returned as a return value. The fluctuation mode selection offset value “00” means that “first half fluctuation pattern 0” is selected as a component of the current fluctuation pattern. Also, if the reach mode determination random number is in the range of 51 to 110, the fluctuation mode selection offset value “01” is returned as a return value, and “half part fluctuation pattern 1” is selected as a component of the present fluctuation pattern become. Similarly, if the reach mode determination random number is in the range of 111 to 200, the fluctuation mode selection offset value "02" is returned as a return value, and "first half fluctuation pattern 2" is selected as a component of the current fluctuation pattern. As a result, if the reach mode decision random number is in the range of 201 to 255, the fluctuation mode selection offset value "03" is returned as a return value, and "first half fluctuation pattern 3" is a component of the current fluctuation pattern. It will be selected.

  (B) in FIG. 26: This table enables selection of the first half variation pattern number using reach mode determination random numbers in the second variation of the special symbol when out of variation (first half variation pattern table defining means). Here, “244” and “255 (FFH)” are defined as the comparison values in the left column of the table, and “04” and “05” are defined as the values of the corresponding fluctuation mode selection offset in the right column. It is done. Therefore, if the reach mode determination random number loaded this time is in the range of 0 to 244, the fluctuation mode selection offset value “04” is returned as a return value, and “first half fluctuation pattern 4” is a component of the current fluctuation pattern. It will be selected. Also, if the reach mode determination random number is in the range of 245 to 255, the fluctuation mode selection offset value “05” is returned as a return value, and “first half fluctuation pattern 5” is selected as a component of the current fluctuation pattern. become.

  As described above, since the first special symbol is subject to variation mainly in the non-time-shortened state, various variation mode selection offsets are accordingly made to realize more various variation display effects in the so-called "normal". It defines options for values (non-specific first-half fluctuation patterns). On the other hand, the second special symbol is mainly subject to fluctuation in the time reduction state, and since it is central to the game characteristic whether or not to win a small hit in the time reduction state, the fluctuation display effect corresponding to such game characteristic It defines options of variation mode selection offset value (specific first half variation pattern) for mainly realizing.

[Configuration Example of Second Half Variation Pattern Selection Table]
FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a first special symbol second half variation pattern selection table. Note that (A) to (D) in FIG. 27 show the tables specified by the values "00" to "03" of the variation mode offsets in distinction by address unit. In each table, the left column indicates the range of the variation pattern determination random number, and the right column indicates the corresponding second half variation pattern number. Here, although a plurality of second-half fluctuation pattern tables are provided as shown in (A) to (D), which one of the second-half fluctuation pattern tables is used is determined by the first-half fluctuation pattern. That is, since the values “00” to “03” of the fluctuation mode offset correspond to “first half fluctuation pattern 0” to “first half fluctuation pattern 3” as described above, in the present embodiment, from the reach mode selection table When the first half variation pattern number is selected, the second half variation pattern table capable of selecting the second half variation pattern is defined in association with it (second half variation pattern table defining means).

[First special symbol]
For example, when the main control CPU 72 sets the fluctuation mode offset “00” as the return value, “first half fluctuation pattern 0” is selected first as a component of the present fluctuation pattern. Then, in the third variation pattern determination process, the main control CPU 72 designates a table address shown in (A) of FIG. In this case, the main control CPU 72 selects "latter half fluctuation pattern 0" regardless of the fluctuation pattern determination random number is any value from 0 to 250, and the fluctuation pattern changes to "latter half fluctuation pattern 0" and "latter half fluctuation It is determined to be a combination of “pattern 0”. At this time, for example, the combination of the “first half fluctuation pattern 0” and the “second half fluctuation pattern 0” corresponds to the “normal change pattern during disconnection” in the category (detail category).

  When the main control CPU 72 sets the fluctuation mode offset “01” as the return value, “first half fluctuation pattern 1” is selected first as a component of the present fluctuation pattern. Then, in the third variation pattern determination process, the main control CPU 72 designates a table address shown in (B) of FIG. In this case, the main control CPU 72 selects the “latter half fluctuation pattern 1” regardless of the fluctuation pattern determination random number is any value from 0 to 250, and the fluctuation patterns are “first half fluctuation pattern 1” and “latter half fluctuation” It is determined to be a combination of “pattern 1”. At this time, for example, the combination of the “first half fluctuation pattern 1” and the “second half fluctuation pattern 1” corresponds to the “normal change pattern when missing” in the category (“first half fluctuation pattern 0” and “second half fluctuation pattern 0” Different from the combination of

  Next, when the main control CPU 72 sets the fluctuation mode offset “02” as the return value, “first half fluctuation pattern 2” is selected first as a component of the present fluctuation pattern. Then, the main control CPU 72 designates a table address shown in (C) of FIG. At this time, if the variation pattern determination random number is in the range of 0 to 200, the main control CPU 72 selects “second half variation pattern 2”, but if the variation pattern determination random number is 201 or more (within the range to 250) The main control CPU 72 selects the “second half fluctuation pattern 3”. At this time, for example, if “the first half fluctuation pattern 2” falls into the “pseudo rerun twice fluctuation” category, a combination of this and “the second half fluctuation pattern 2” becomes “the second half fluctuation pattern” This corresponds to the “off-time pseudo ream two-time fluctuation pattern A”. On the other hand, the combination of the "first half fluctuation pattern 2" and the "second half fluctuation pattern 3" corresponds to the "off-time pseudo-repeat two-time fluctuation pattern B" in the pseudo-continuous two-time fluctuation category, and both are different from each other It becomes a pattern.

  When the main control CPU 72 sets the fluctuation mode offset “03” as the return value, “first half fluctuation pattern 3” is selected first as a component of the present fluctuation pattern. Then, the main control CPU 72 designates a table address shown in (D) of FIG. At this time, if the variation pattern determination random number is in the range of 0 to 196, the main control CPU 72 selects “second half variation pattern 3”, but if the variation pattern determination random number is in the range of 197 to 246, the main control The CPU 72 selects the “second half fluctuation pattern 4”. Similarly, if the variation pattern determination random number is in the range of 247 to 249, the main control CPU 72 selects "second half variation pattern 5", and if the variation pattern determination random number is 250, the main control CPU 72 selects "second half variation pattern 6 will be selected. At this time, if the “first half fluctuation pattern 3” falls under the category “pseudo-repeat 3 times fluctuation at the time of operation memory number before fluctuation,” the combination of this and the “second half fluctuation pattern 3” This corresponds to “a false continuous three times fluctuation pattern A at the time of out of place” in the pseudo consecutive three times fluctuation category when the memory number is 0. In addition, the combination of “first half fluctuation pattern 3” and “second half fluctuation pattern 4” corresponds to “off-time pseudo continuous three times fluctuation pattern B” in the same category, and “first half fluctuation pattern 3” and “second half fluctuation pattern 3” The combination of the variation pattern 5 corresponds to the “off-time pseudo continuous three variation pattern C” in the same category, and the combination of the “first half variation pattern 3” and the “second half variation pattern 6” is in the same category Corresponds to the “off-time pseudo continuous three-time fluctuation pattern D” in FIG.

  In the present embodiment, “first half variation pattern 0”, “first half variation pattern 1”, “first half variation pattern 2” and “first half variation pattern 3” corresponding to the first special symbol are all non-specific first half variations Although a pattern is used, “first half variation pattern 2” and “first half variation pattern 3” may be set as a specific first half variation pattern. In addition, “second half fluctuation pattern 1”, “second half fluctuation pattern 2”, “second half fluctuation pattern 3”, “second half fluctuation pattern 4”, “second half fluctuation pattern 5” and “second half fluctuation pattern 6” are all non-specific second half It is a fluctuation pattern.

[Second special symbol]
Next, FIG. 28 is a view showing a configuration example of a second special symbol second half variation pattern selection table. Note that (A) and (B) in FIG. 28 show the tables specified by the fluctuation mode offset values “04” and “05” in an address unit. In each table, the left column indicates the range of the variation pattern determination random number, and the right column indicates the corresponding second half variation pattern number. Also in this case, a plurality of second-half fluctuation pattern tables are provided as shown in (A) and (B), but which one of the second-half fluctuation pattern tables is used is determined by the first-half fluctuation pattern. That is, since the values "04" and "05" of the fluctuation mode offset correspond to the "first half fluctuation pattern 4" or the "first half fluctuation pattern 5" as described above, also for the second special symbol, reach mode selection When the first half variation pattern number is selected from the table, the second half variation pattern table capable of selecting the second half variation pattern is defined in association with it (second half variation pattern table defining means).

  For example, when the main control CPU 72 sets the fluctuation mode offset “04” as the return value, “first half fluctuation pattern 4” is selected first as a component of the present fluctuation pattern. Then, in the third variation pattern determination process, the main control CPU 72 designates a table address shown in (A) of FIG. In this case, if the variation pattern determination random number is in the range of 0 to 200, the main control CPU 72 selects the “second half variation pattern 10”, and the variation patterns “first half variation pattern 4” and “second half variation pattern 10” It is determined to be composed of a combination of On the other hand, if the variation pattern determination random number is 201 or more (within the range up to 250), the main control CPU 72 selects the “second half variation pattern 11”, and the variation pattern is “first half variation pattern 4” and “second half variation It is determined to be configured by a combination of “pattern 11”. At this time, for example, if "the first half fluctuation pattern 4" corresponds to the category "the second special symbol normal fluctuation in the time reduction state", the combination of this and the "second half fluctuation pattern 10" is in the category It corresponds to "time change pattern A normal fluctuation pattern A". On the other hand, the combination of the “first half fluctuation pattern 4” and the “second half fluctuation pattern 11” corresponds to the “time change normal fluctuation pattern B” in the same category, and both become different fluctuation patterns.

  Alternatively, when the main control CPU 72 sets the fluctuation mode offset “05” as the return value, “first half fluctuation pattern 5” is selected first as a component of the present fluctuation pattern. Then, the main control CPU 72 designates a table address shown in (B) of FIG. At this time, if the variation pattern determination random number is in the range of 0 to 196, the main control CPU 72 selects “second half variation pattern 10”, but if the variation pattern determination random number is in the range of 197 to 229, the main control The CPU 72 selects the “second half fluctuation pattern 11”. Similarly, if the variation pattern determination random number is in the range of 230 to 246, the main control CPU 72 selects "second half variation pattern 13", and if the variation pattern determination random number is in the range of 247 to 249, the main control CPU 72 The “second half fluctuation pattern 14” is selected, and if the fluctuation pattern determination random number is 250, the main control CPU 72 selects the “second half fluctuation pattern 9”. At this time, for example, if "the first half fluctuation pattern 5" falls under the category "the second special symbol normal fluctuation in the non-time-shortened state (when the second special symbol fluctuates at the time of normal)" The combination of the second-half fluctuation pattern 10 "corresponds to" non-time-saving, middle-duration normal fluctuation pattern A "in the category. Further, the combination of the “first half fluctuation pattern 5” and the “second half fluctuation pattern 11” corresponds to the “non-time-span-time normal fluctuation pattern B” in the same category. Further, the combination of the “first half fluctuation pattern 5” and the “second half fluctuation pattern 13” corresponds to the “time change normal first variation pattern C” in the same category, and the “first half fluctuation pattern 5” and “second half fluctuation pattern The combination of the variation pattern 14 corresponds to the “non-time-span-middle normal variation pattern C” in the same category, and the combination of the “first half variation pattern 5” and the “second half variation pattern 9” is in the same category Corresponds to the “non-time-span-time normal fluctuation pattern D” in the above, and all have different fluctuation patterns.

  In the present embodiment, the “first half variation pattern 4” and the “first half variation pattern 5” corresponding to the second special symbol are both set as a specific first half variation pattern. Further, “second half fluctuation pattern 10” and “second half fluctuation pattern 11” shown in shaded cells in FIG. 28 are set as specific second half fluctuation patterns, and other “second half fluctuation pattern 13” and “second half fluctuation pattern 14” And “second-half fluctuation pattern 9” is a non-specific fluctuation pattern.

[Example of combination of first half fluctuation pattern and second half fluctuation pattern]
The fluctuation pattern finally determined from the above table is roughly divided into the following three combinations (variation pattern determination means).
(1) Combination of non-specific first half fluctuation pattern and non-specific second half fluctuation pattern “first half fluctuation pattern 0” + “second half fluctuation pattern 0”
"First half fluctuation pattern 1" + "second half fluctuation pattern 1"
"First half fluctuation pattern 2" + "second half fluctuation pattern 2"
"First half fluctuation pattern 2" + "second half fluctuation pattern 3"
"First half fluctuation pattern 3" + "second half fluctuation pattern 3"
"First half fluctuation pattern 3" + "second half fluctuation pattern 4"
"First half fluctuation pattern 3" + "second half fluctuation pattern 5"
"First half fluctuation pattern 3" + "second half fluctuation pattern 6"
(2) A combination of a specific first half fluctuation pattern and a nonspecific second half fluctuation pattern "First half fluctuation pattern 5" + "second half fluctuation pattern 13"
"First half fluctuation pattern 5" + "second half fluctuation pattern 14"
"First half fluctuation pattern 5" + "second half fluctuation pattern 9"
(3) A combination of a specific first half fluctuation pattern and a specific second half fluctuation pattern "First half fluctuation pattern 4" + "second half fluctuation pattern 10"
"First half fluctuation pattern 4" + "second half fluctuation pattern 11"
"First half fluctuation pattern 5" + "second half fluctuation pattern 10"
"First half fluctuation pattern 5" + "second half fluctuation pattern 11"

  Among these, since the combination of said (1) is determined as a fluctuation pattern of a 1st special symbol, the definite period of time at the time of stop display can be made into standard definite period of time (for example, 0.5 second). On the other hand, the combination of the above (2) and (3) is determined as the variation pattern of the second special symbol, but in this embodiment, any of the three combinations shown in the above (2) is Although the fixed time at the stop display time is the standard fixed time (for example, 0.5 seconds), the fixed time at the stop display time is the special fixed time (for example, 2.0 seconds) for the four combinations shown in the above (3) Control is being performed.

  However, when the fluctuation pattern is determined by the combination of the “first half fluctuation pattern” and the “second half fluctuation pattern”, the number of combinations increases as the number of “first half fluctuation pattern” and “second half fluctuation pattern” as components increases. Therefore, when trying to determine "whether the variation pattern is composed of a specific first half variation pattern and a combination of a specific second half variation pattern", the processing load increases that much, and the program for that amount also increases. Capacity also increases.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, "whether or not the variation pattern is configured by a combination of a specific first half variation pattern and a specific second half variation pattern" is not determined in detail, but only with the "second half variation pattern". In this way, optimization such as reduction of processing load and reduction of program capacity is achieved. The details will be described below.

[Stop display fixed time determination process]
FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the stop display determination time determination process used in the present embodiment. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the determined time at the time of the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

  Step S2470: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the latter half fluctuation pattern determined in the third fluctuation pattern determination process (step S2466 in FIG. 22) is the “second half fluctuation pattern 10”. As a result, when the “second half fluctuation pattern 10” is determined (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S2472. On the other hand, when the “second half fluctuation pattern 10” is not determined (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S2474.

[Step S2470: No)
Step S2474: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the latter half fluctuation pattern determined in the fluctuation pattern determination third process is the “second half fluctuation pattern 11”. As a result, when the “second half fluctuation pattern 11” is determined (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S2472. On the other hand, when the “second half fluctuation pattern 11” is not determined (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S2476.

[Step S2470 or Step S2474: In the case of Yes]
Step S2472: The main control CPU 72 sets a special determination time (for example, 2.0 seconds) as the current stop display determination time.

[Step S2474: No)
Step S2476: The main control CPU 72 sets a standard determination time (for example, 0.5 seconds) as the current stop display determination time.
When the above processing is executed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the caller.

Comparative Example
FIG. 30 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for determining a stop display time determined as a comparative example. The superiority of the present embodiment will be more apparent from the comparison with the comparative example described below.

  Step S2480: In the comparative example, the main control CPU 72 determines that the first half fluctuation pattern determined in the second fluctuation pattern determination process (step S2460 in FIG. 22) is “first half fluctuation pattern 4” and the third variation pattern determination process ( It is confirmed whether or not the latter half fluctuation pattern determined in step S2466) in FIG. 22 is the “second half fluctuation pattern 10”. That is, it is understood that the processing load of the main control CPU 72 is increased as the logic of judgment is more complicated as compared with the previous embodiment. Here, if the determination result is affirmative (Yes), the main control CPU 72 can proceed to step S2482, but if the determination result is negative (No), the main control CPU 72 must not make the determination of the next step S2484. You must.

[Step S2480: No)
Step S2484: The main control CPU 72 determines that the first half variation pattern determined in the second variation pattern determination process is “first half variation pattern 4”, and the second half variation pattern determined in the third variation pattern determination process indicates “second half variation pattern 11 It is necessary to confirm whether or not Here, if the determination result is affirmative (Yes), the main control CPU 72 can proceed to step S2482, but if the determination result is negative (No), the main control CPU 72 must not make the determination of the next step S2486. You must.

[Step S2484: No)
Step S2486: The main control CPU 72 determines that the first half variation pattern determined in the second variation pattern determination process is “first half variation pattern 5” and the second half variation pattern determined in the third variation pattern determination process “second half variation It is necessary to confirm whether the pattern is 10 ". Here, if the determination result is affirmative (Yes), the main control CPU 72 can proceed to step S2482, but if the determination result is negative (No), the main control CPU 72 must not make the determination of the next step S2488. You must.

[Step S2486: No)
Step S2488: The main control CPU 72 determines that the first half variation pattern determined in the second variation pattern determination process is “first half variation pattern 5”, and the second half variation pattern determined in the third variation pattern determination process indicates “second half variation pattern 11 It is necessary to confirm whether or not If the determination result is positive (Yes), the main control CPU 72 can finally proceed to step S2482, and if the determination result is negative (No), the main control CPU 72 can proceed to step S2490. .

[Steps S2480, S2484, S2486 or S2488: In the case of Yes]
Step S2482: The main control CPU 72 sets a special determination time (for example, 2.0 seconds) as the current stop display determination time.

[Step S2488: In the case of No]
Step S2490: The main control CPU 72 sets a standard determination time (for example, 0.5 seconds) as the current stop display determination time.
When the above processing is executed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the caller.

[Superiority of this embodiment]
As apparent from the comparison with the above comparative example, the present embodiment has the following advantages.
(1) In other words, when it is necessary to perform control to make the setting of the fixed time at the time of stop display different according to the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation pattern is determined by the combination of a plurality of constituent elements. Assuming that the main control CPU 72 makes a determination such as “a combination of pattern and specific second-half fluctuation pattern”, the processing load is increased as in the comparative example. This means that as the number of “first half fluctuation pattern” and “second half fluctuation pattern” increases, the number of combinations also increases, and the increase in processing load becomes serious.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, the configuration (FIG. 28) of “table enabling selection of a specific second-half variation pattern only when a specific second-half variation pattern is selected” is used. It is possible to determine "whether or not a combination of a specific first half change pattern and a specific second half change pattern" by simply determining whether it is a change pattern or not. Thus, the processing load required for control of the main control CPU 72 can be significantly reduced.

(2) Further, in the stop display determination time determination process (FIG. 29) of the present embodiment, the number of steps is suppressed to a small number as compared with the process (FIG. 30) of the comparative example. Therefore, the program capacity can be reduced along with the reduction of the processing load, and the processing can be optimized.

[Special symbol stop display processing]
Next, FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of processing during special symbol stop display. Each step will be described below.

  Step S4100: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the stop symbol display timer is already under subtraction. If it is the first call, the stop symbol display timer is set to the initial value (maximum value), and since the main control CPU 72 has not yet subtracted the value of the stop symbol display timer (No), the process proceeds to step S4110.

  Step S4110: The main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the stop symbol display timer (decrements by the interrupt cycle), and proceeds to step S4610.

  Step S4610: Here, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the number cut counter. In the "count reduction counter", the counter value related to the "time reduction state" is set in the time reduction count area of the RAM 76. In this embodiment, a so-called time cut function of number cut is adopted, and "number cut" is not set by a simple change number but set by using two types of counters. That is, the "first count cut counter" and the "second count cut counter" are used as two types of counters, and each value is updated (decremented) according to the special symbol to be changed. For example, when shifting to the "time reduction state" after the end of the big hit game, the first number cut counter value (first counter value) for the time reduction state is set to a predetermined numerical value (for example, four times) The 2-counting counter value is set to a prescribed numerical value (for example, eight times). The information on the first count cutoff value and the second count counter value is notified (sent) to the effect control device 124 by a remaining count command (first remaining count command, second remaining count command).

  Step S4620: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the loaded counter value (first count cut counter value or second count cut counter value) is 0 (= set value). At this time, if the number cut counter value is already 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game processing. On the other hand, if the number cut counter value is not 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4630.

  Step S4630: The main control CPU 72 decrements (subtracts 1) the first number cut counter value and the second number cut counter value. Specifically, when the second special symbol is being displayed for a stop (when calling for the first time), both the first number cut counter value and the second number cut counter value are decremented, and the first special symbol is stopped. If it is in display (when calling for the first time), only the second number cut counter value is decremented (update means). However, when the second number cut counter value becomes “0” earlier than the first number cut counter value due to the decrement, the termination condition of the time saving state is satisfied thereby, the main control CPU 72 also sets the second number cut counter value. Update to "0". On the other hand, when the first count counter value becomes "0" before the second count counter value, the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied, but the main control CPU 72 sets the second count counter value Do not update to 0 ".

  Step S4635: The main control CPU 72 executes a remaining number command generation process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes the above-mentioned first remaining number command and second remaining number command based on the first number cutting counter value and the second number cutting counter value decremented (updated) in the previous step S4630. Generate

  Step S4640: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the subtraction result of any one of the number cut counter values (first number cut counter value or second number cut counter value) is zero. As a result of subtraction, when any of the number cut counter values is not 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game processing. On the other hand, when one of the number-of-times cutting counter value is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S4650.

  Step S4650: Here, the main control CPU 72 resets the flag at the time of operation of the number cut function. In the present embodiment, the count counter value related to the time saving state is set to a predetermined numerical value (for example, four times or eight times). For this reason, the time shortening function operation flag is reset when the change of the second special symbol out of four times (including the small hit fluctuation at that time when the specific area has not passed) is executed in the time shortened state. Be done. On the other hand, even if the first special symbol out-of-round variation is performed four times in the time-saving state, the time shortening function operation flag is not reset, and then the first special symbol or the second special symbol four times in a further time-saving state When the out-of-range variation is performed, the time saving function activation flag is reset. Thus, the time reduction state ends after the stop display of the special symbol. In addition, although the time shortening function operation flag is explained by the example which is reset when the stop display time of the special symbol passes, it is reset when the fluctuation time of the special symbol ends (before stop display time measurement start) Good. When the above procedure is completed, the processing returns to the special symbol game processing.

  Thus, the termination condition of the time reduction state (predetermined termination condition) is the case where the number of times of fluctuation of the second special symbol from the transition to the time reduction state reaches the first prescribed number (four times), or The total number of times of variation of the first special symbol and the number of variations of the second special symbol after transitioning to the time reduction state The total number of times of variation reaches the second prescribed number of times (eight times) greater than the first number It is a condition to be satisfied at the time of the first call of processing during special symbol stop display (at the end of the fluctuation time). In other words, when the main control CPU 72 internally sets the first number cut counter value to “0 (set value)” in control, or the second number cut counter value is “0 (set value)”. In this case, an end condition which is satisfied without waiting for the elapse of the determined time is set (end condition setting means).

  Also, by executing such processing, the main control CPU72, when the end condition of the time reduction state is satisfied (the number of times of the variable display of the symbol after transition to the time reduction state is a specific number of times (for example, 4 times Etc.), the time shortening state (advantage game state) can be ended to shift to the non-time shortening state (predetermined game state) (predetermined game state transition means).

[When calling after the first time: Step S4100: Yes]
Step S4150: At the time of calling after the first time, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the stop symbol display timer (decrements by an interrupt cycle).

  Step S4200: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the stop display time has ended based on the value of the stop symbol display timer subtracted this time. Specifically, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is not 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time (fixed time) has not ended yet (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game processing, jumps from the execution selection processing (step S1000 in FIG. 16) also in the next interrupt cycle, and repeatedly executes the special symbol stop display processing. However, if the number cut counter value has already become 0 at the first call (step S4640: YES), the time saving state has already ended and is in the non-time saving state (step S4650).

  On the other hand, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has ended (Yes). In this case, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4250.

  Step S4250: The main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command and a stop display time end command. The symbol stop command and the stop display time end command are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above. Further, the main control CPU 72 erases the flag during the symbol fluctuation here. The "stop display time end command" is a command indicating that the stop display time of the special symbol has ended (elapsed).

  Step S4300: Here, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value (01H) of the big hit flag is set. If the value (01H) of the jackpot flag is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4350.

[At the time of winning]
Step S4350: The main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination of the jump table to “variable winning device management processing”. The main control CPU 72 executes processing to set various functions inoperative in this processing. Specifically, the time saving function is deactivated. As a result, before the special game (overall role) is started, the state is shifted to the normal state (non-time-shortened state).

  When the above procedure is completed at the time of the jackpot, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game processing.

[When not winning]
On the other hand, in the case other than the big hit time, the following procedure is executed.
That is, when the main control CPU 72 determines that the value (01H) of the big hit flag is not set in step S4300 (No), it next executes step S4600.

  Step S4600: The main control CPU 72 next checks whether the small hit flag value (01H) is set or not. Then, if the small hit flag value (01H) is not set either and it is simply out of step (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4602.

  Step S4602: The main control CPU 72 sets the address of special symbol variation pre-processing as the jump destination address of the jump table.

  Step S4605: On the other hand, when the small hit flag value (01H) is set (Step S4600: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the address of the variable winning device management process as the jump destination address of the jump table.

  Step S4608: The main control CPU 72 executes special variation management processing. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of managing special variation executed after the end of the big hit game. The management of special variation is the first special symbol from after the big hit game end based on "which game state which jackpot hit and the variation target was the first special symbol / the second special symbol" And it is done to manage the fluctuation state of the second special symbol. Although not particularly illustrated, in this embodiment, depending on which winning symbol according to the gaming state, the variation at that time was the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the variation after the big hit game end The fluctuation state in each number of fluctuation until the number of times reaches 1 to 8 is managed by a plurality of tables. In the special fluctuation state, the fluctuation pattern selected in each fluctuation becomes the special fluctuation pattern or the normal fluctuation pattern, and the setting of the selection ratio of the reach fluctuation and the fluctuation time is specified for each table.

  When the above processing is executed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the caller.

[Display output management process]
Next, FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 11) executed in the interrupt management process. The display output management process is a special symbol display setting process (step S1200), a normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), a status display setting process (step S1220), an operation memory display setting process (step S1230), a continuous operation number display setting The configuration includes a subroutine group of the process (step S1240).

  Among them, the special symbol display setting process (step S1200), the normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), and the operation memory display setting process (step S1230) are the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special as described above. Generates and outputs a drive signal applied to each of the LEDs of the symbol display device 35, the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a and the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a It is a process.

  The state display setting process (step S1220) and the continuous operation number display setting process (step S1240) are processes for generating and outputting drive signals to be applied to each LED of the gaming state display device 38. First, in the state display setting process, the main control CPU 72 controls lighting of the short time state display lamp 38 e according to the value of the time shortening function activation flag. For example, if the time shortening function activation flag is set to the value (01H) when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control CPU 72 sets the time saving status indicator 38e regardless of whether the power is on or not. Output a lighting signal to the corresponding LED. Further, the main control CPU 72 controls lighting of the launch position designation display lamp 38f in accordance with the special game management status. For example, when the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is activated due to a big hit game or a small hit game, the main control CPU 72 turns on a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the firing position designation display lamp 38 f Output. Further, if the value (01H) is set in the time reduction function activation flag, the main control CPU 72 turns on the lighting signal for the LED corresponding to the firing position designation display lamp 38f in addition to the above time saving status display lamp 38e. Output It should be noted that the launch position designation display lamp 38f lights up from the start of the big hit game until the end of the "time reduced state" when shifting to the "time reduced state" after the big hit game, and does not light up when the "time reduced state" ends. It becomes (OFF).

  Further, the main control CPU 72 controls lighting of the big hit type display lamps 38a and 38b in the continuous operation number display setting process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal for one of the big hit type display lamps 38a and 38b based on the value of the above-mentioned continuous operation number status. At this time, it is the display lamp 38a, 38b corresponding to the jackpot symbol designated by the value of the continuous operation number status that is the target of outputting the lighting signal. For example, if the value of the continuous operation number status designates "16 rounds", the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38b representing "16 rounds (16R)". Furthermore, if the value of the continuous operation number status designates "15 rounds", the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38a representing "15 rounds (15R)".

[Variable winning device management process]
Next, the details of the variable winning device management process will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the variable winning device management process. Variable winning device management processing, game process selection processing (step S5100), big winning opening opening pattern setting processing (step S5200), big winning opening opening and closing operation processing (step S5300), big winning opening closing processing (step S5400), end The configuration includes a subroutine group of processing (step S5500).

  Step S5100: In the gaming process selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (one of steps S5200 to S5500). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the address of the jump destination, and sets the end of the variable winning device management process in the stack pointer as the return address. Which process to select as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the process performed so far. For example, in a situation where the operation (opening and closing operation) of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 has not yet started, the main control CPU 72 sets the big winning opening opening pattern setting process as the next jump destination (step S5200) is selected. On the other hand, if the special winning opening opening pattern setting process has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the special winning opening opening / closing operation processing (step S5300) as the next jump destination, and is completed until the special winning opening opening operation processing. Then, the special winning opening closing process (step S5400) is selected as the next jump destination. In addition, when the special winning opening / closing operation processing and the special winning opening closing processing are repeatedly executed over the set number of continuous operations (the number of rounds), the main control CPU 72 selects the ending processing (step S5500) as the next jump destination. . Each process will be described in more detail below.

[Large winning opening opening pattern setting processing]
FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing a procedure example of the special winning opening open pattern setting process. This process is for setting conditions such as the number of times of opening and closing operations of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 at the time of big hit or small hit, and the time of each opening. Each step will be described below.

  Step S5202: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value (01H) of the big hit flag is set. As a result of this confirmation, when the value (01H) of the big hit flag is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5203. On the other hand, when the value (01H) of the big hit flag is not set (No), that is, when the value (01H) of the small hit flag is set, the main control CPU 72 executes step S5204 next.

  Step S5203: The main control CPU 72 executes a big hit big winning opening opening pattern setting process. In this process, the opening pattern of the big winning opening corresponding to the winning symbol for the big hit is set based on the big hit symbol opening pattern setting table. The specific contents of the process will be described later with reference to another flowchart. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S5205.

  Step S5204: The main control CPU 72 executes small hit time large winning opening opening pattern setting processing. In this process, the opening pattern of the big winning opening is set based on the opening pattern setting table according to the small hitting pattern. The specific contents of the process will be described later with reference to another flowchart. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S5205.

  Step S5205: When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the special winning opening / closing operation processing, and returns to the variable winning device management processing.

[Big hit big winning opening opening pattern setting processing]
FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of a big hit big winning opening opening pattern setting process. The contents will be described below along the procedure example.

  Step S5210: The main control CPU 72 operates the condition device and the character continuous actuation device. Here, the “condition device” is a device whose operation is a condition necessary for the operation of the accessory continuous actuation device, and the “character continuous actuation device” is the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable prize device. The variable winning device 31 can be operated continuously. The "condition device" or the "character continuous actuation device" may be used as a control flag. Therefore, the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 do not operate in the big hit game unless the condition device is activated. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S5212.

  Step S5212: The main control CPU 72 sets "big bonus start (big hit game in progress)" as an internal state flag in control. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the continuous operation number status according to the type of the big hit symbol. In the present embodiment, the value representing “15 rounds” is set as the continuous operation number status regardless of the type of the big hit symbol. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a state command representing a big hit. A state command representing a big hit is sent to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S5214.

  Step S5214: The main control CPU 72 executes an open pattern selection process according to the big hit. In this process, the main control CPU 72 refers to the big hit pattern-by-pattern open pattern setting table, and selects the open pattern corresponding to the type of the winning symbol regarding the special symbol. Here, the opening pattern represents the setting for operating the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31, and represents, for example, the setting of the number of execution rounds, the opening time, the interval time, and the like. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S5216.

[Big hit pattern open pattern setting table by design]
FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of a big hit pattern-based open pattern setting table. The big hit pattern open pattern setting table for this big hit defines the opening and closing operation pattern of the variable winning device (the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31) to be operated for each round by different winning symbols for the special symbol. It is. Specifically, the opening pattern of the following special winning opening is determined for each winning symbol.

[First winning symbol]
When it corresponds to the first winning symbol, the type of the variable winning device to be operated is the first variable winning device 30. In addition, the number of execution rounds is 15 rounds, and 5 rounds among them are rounds with a ball. And the opening time which open | releases the 1st big winning a prize opening 30b per round in a round with a ball is 29.0 seconds, and the opening time in the round without a ball is 0.5 second. Moreover, the interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second (5.0 seconds between rounds without balls).

  As described above, when the winning symbol relating to the special symbol is the first winning symbol, when the big hit game is started, the first variable winning device 30 during each round for 29.0 seconds from the first round to the fifth round. Operated to open the first big winning opening 30b (but closed when the upper limit number of ball entry is confirmed. The same applies hereinafter), and the first variable winning device 30 from the sixth round to the fifteenth round. Opens for 0.5 seconds. Therefore, when it corresponds to the first winning symbol, it is possible to substantially obtain five rounds of the game.

[Second winning symbol]
When it corresponds to the second winning symbol, the type of the variable winning device to be operated is the first variable winning device 30. In addition, the number of execution rounds is 15 rounds, and 5 rounds among them are rounds with a ball. And the opening time which open | releases the 1st big winning a prize opening 30b per round in a round with a ball is 29.0 seconds, and the opening time in the round without a ball is 0.5 second. Moreover, the interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second (5.0 seconds between rounds without balls).

  Thus, when the winning symbol relating to the special symbol is the second winning symbol, when the big hit game is started, the first variable winning device 30 during each round for 29.0 seconds from the first round to the fifth round. In operation, the first large winning opening 30b is opened, and the first variable winning device 30 is opened for 0.5 seconds from the sixth round to the fifteenth round. Therefore, when it corresponds to the second winning symbol, it is possible to substantially obtain five rounds of the game.

[Third winning symbol]
When it corresponds to the third winning symbol, the type of variable winning device to be operated is the first variable winning device 30. In addition, the number of execution rounds is 15 rounds, and 15 rounds among them are rounds with appearing balls. And the opening time which open | releases the 1st big winning a prize mouth 30b per round in a round with a ball is 29.0 seconds. Moreover, the interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

  As described above, when the winning symbol relating to the special symbol is the third winning symbol, when the big hit game is started, the first variable winning device 30 during each round for 29.0 seconds from the first round to the fifteenth round. In operation, the first big winning opening 30b is opened. Therefore, when it corresponds to the third winning symbol, it is possible to substantially obtain 15 rounds of the game.

  As described above, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening pattern of the big winning opening corresponding to the type of the winning symbol with reference to the above-mentioned big hit symbol classified opening pattern setting table.

[Refer to Figure 35: Big hit big winning opening opening pattern setting process]
Step S5216: The main control CPU 72 sets the operation of the first variable winning device 30. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets, as the first variable winning device 30, the type of a variable winning device to be operated every round (one round to the last round) in the big hit game based on the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol. Do. In the present embodiment, since the opening pattern corresponding to all big hit winning symbols (first winning symbol to third winning symbol) is opened from the first round to the last round, the first big winning opening 30b is opened. The operation of the first variable winning device 30 is set. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S5218.

  Step S5218: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of rounds to be executed during the big hit game on the basis of the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol. In the present embodiment, fifteen rounds are set as the number of execution rounds of the release pattern corresponding to all big hit winning symbols (first to third winning symbols). Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S5220.

  Step S5220: The main control CPU 72 sets a big hit open timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets an opening time (opening timer) per opening at the time of opening the big winning opening for each round at the time of big hit. In the present embodiment, it is set for each round based on the opening time of the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol (first to third winning symbol) at the time of the big hit. For example, in the case of the first winning symbol, the opening time for opening the first large winning opening 30b is set to 29.0 seconds for the round with balls, and the first large winning hole 30b for the round without balls. The release time to release the is set to 0.5 seconds. Therefore, if about 29.0 seconds is set as the value of the opening timer, the opening time is a sufficient time for the ball to easily enter the first large winning opening 30b during one opening (for example, shooting) It is a time during which ten or more gaming balls are fired by the control board set 174 (preferably, six seconds or more). On the other hand, if about 0.5 seconds are set as the value of the opening timer, the opening time is a time when it is difficult to enter the first large winning opening 30b during one opening. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S5222.

  Step S5222: The main control CPU 72 sets a big hit time interval timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a standby time (interval timer) between rounds at the time of a big hit. In this embodiment, it is 1.0 second as an interval timer of the open pattern corresponding to the winning symbols (the first winning symbol to the third winning symbol) at all the big hit 1.0 seconds (5.0 seconds between no balls). ) Is set. For example, after the opening of the first large winning opening 30b between the first round and the second round is finished and once closed, an interval timer of about 1.0 second is set. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S5224.

  Step S5224: The main control CPU 72 generates a continuous operation number command. The continuous operation number command can be generated based on the number of execution rounds set in the previous process (step S5218). Therefore, based on the execution round number "15R" of the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol (the first winning symbol to the third winning symbol) at the time of big hit, the continuous operation number command is generated a value representing "15 rounds" . The generated continuous operation number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above.

  When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special winning opening open pattern setting process (FIG. 34).

[Small hit big winning opening opening pattern setting processing]
FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting processing. Hereinafter, description will be made along the procedure example.

  Step S5252: The main control CPU 72 sets “small hit start (small hit game in progress)” as an internal state flag in control. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a state command indicating that the small hit game is in progress. A state command representing that a small hit game is in progress is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above. The main control CPU 72 next executes step S5254.

  Step S5254: The main control CPU 72 executes small hit open pattern selection processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 refers to the small hit open pattern setting table and selects the open pattern. Here, the release pattern represents a setting for operating the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31, and represents, for example, settings such as the number of times of opening, opening time, interval time, opening time of the specific area 31x, etc. ing. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S5256.

[Open pattern setting table for small hit]
FIG. 38 is a diagram showing an example of the small hit open pattern setting table. The small hit opening pattern setting table defines the open / close operation pattern of the variable winning device (second variable winning device 31). In addition, in this embodiment, although the open pattern set at the time of a small hit is one, you may define multiple according to a winning symbol.

  When it corresponds to a small hit, the type of the variable winning device to be operated is the second variable winning device 31. Further, the opening number of the second variable winning prize device 31 is twice, and the opening time of the second variable winning device 31 is 0.9 seconds. The interval time is set to, for example, about 1.0 second.

The opening start time of the specific area 31x (the timing at which the specific area solenoid 99 is turned on to operate the specific area slide member 31c) is 0.2 seconds after the opening of the second variable winning device 31 is started.
In addition, the open end time of the specific area 31x (the timing when the specific area solenoid 99 is turned off to deactivate the specific area slide member 31c) is 1.8 seconds after the start of the opening of the second variable winning device 31. .

[Refer to FIG. 37: Small hit big winning opening opening pattern setting process]
Step S5256: The main control CPU 72 sets the operation of the second variable winning device 31. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the type of the variable winning device to be operated during the small hit game in the second variable winning device 31 based on the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S5258.

  Step S5258: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of times of release. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of times of opening executed during the small hit game, based on the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. In the present embodiment, two times are set as the number of times of release of the release pattern corresponding to the small hit. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S5260.

  Step S5260: The main control CPU 72 sets a small hit open timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets an open time per opening (open timer) when opening the big winning opening based on the open pattern corresponding to the small hit time. In the present embodiment, 0.9 seconds is set based on the open time of the open pattern corresponding to the small hit. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S5262.

  Step S5262: The main control CPU 72 sets a small hit time interval timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a standby time (interval timer) between the opening of the big winning opening based on the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit time. In the present embodiment, the interval timer is set to a predetermined time (for example, 1.0 second). Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S5264.

  Step S5264: The main control CPU 72 sets an open timer of the specific area 31x (slide member 31c for specific area). Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the open time (open timer) of the specific area 31x during the small hit game based on the open pattern corresponding to the small hit time. In the present embodiment, the specific area 31x is opened 0.2 seconds after the opening of the second variable winning apparatus 31 is started, and the specific area 31x is closed 1.8 seconds after the opening of the second variable winning apparatus 31 Be done.

  When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special winning opening open pattern setting process (FIG. 34).

[Big winning opening opening and closing operation processing]
FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the special winning opening / closing operation process. This process is mainly for controlling the opening and closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31. Hereinafter, the procedure will be described.

  Step S5302: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current internal state is “in a large role”. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the flag buffer of the RAM 76, and the present internal state is "Whether the flag of" big game (big hit game) "" is set as the internal state flag in control or not. Check if it is a major role. In addition, the flag of "big game (big hit game)" is set by the main control CPU 72 during previous processing (during big hit big winning opening opening pattern setting processing: step S5212) and specific area passing processing described later . As a result of the confirmation, when the current internal state is “in a large role” (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5306. On the other hand, when the current internal state is not “in a large role” (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5304.

  Step S5304: The main control CPU 72 executes a second large winning opening opening and closing operation processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 operates the second variable winning device 31 to open and close the second large winning opening 31b based on the set opening pattern (apply to the second large winning opening solenoid 97). Output a drive signal). The specific contents of the process will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  Step S5306: The main control CPU 72 executes a first large winning opening opening and closing operation processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 operates the first variable winning device 30 to open and close the first large winning opening 30b based on the set opening pattern (apply to the first large winning opening solenoid 90) Output a drive signal). The specific contents of the process will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process (FIG. 33).

[Second big winning opening opening and closing operation processing]
FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the second big winning opening / closing operation process. The contents will be described below along the procedure example.

  Step S5310: The main control CPU 72 opens the second large winning opening 31b. Specifically, a drive signal to be applied to the second large winning opening solenoid 97 is output. Thereby, the second variable winning device 31 operates to shift from the closed state to the open state. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S5312.

  Step S5312: The main control CPU 72 executes an open timer countdown process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes the countdown of the release timer set in the previous process (step S5260 or step S5264 of the small hit large winning opening open pattern setting process (in FIG. 37)). In this process, in addition to the opening timer for opening the second big winning opening 31b, a countdown is performed on the opening timer (opening start time, opening end time) for opening the specific area 31x. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S5314.

  Step S5314: The main control CPU 72 executes a specific area opening / closing operation process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 operates the slide member 31c for the specific area to open and close the specific area 31x based on the set open pattern (outputs a drive signal to be applied to the specific area solenoid 99) Do the processing. The specific contents of the process will be described later with reference to another flowchart. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S5316.

  Step S5316: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time of the second large winning opening 31b is ended. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the release timer for the second large winning opening 31b during the countdown process is 0 or less. As a result of this confirmation, when the opening time of the second big winning opening 31b is ended (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5322. On the other hand, when the opening time of the second big winning opening 31b is not finished (No), the main control CPU72 next executes step S5318.

  Step S5318: The main control CPU 72 executes a winning ball number counting process. In this process, the number of gaming balls that have won in the second variable winning device 31 (a large winning opening in an open) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the value of the count number based on the winning detection signal input from the second count switch 85 within the opening time. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S5320.

  Step S5320: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (10). The predetermined number defines the upper limit (upper limit of winning balls) of the number of winning balls allowed per opening per small hit as described above. If the count number has not reached the predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process. Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, since the jump destination is currently set to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process, the main control CPU 72 repeatedly executes the procedure of step S5310 to step S5320 described above.

  If it is determined in step S5316 that the open time has ended (Yes), or if it is confirmed in step S5320 that the count number has reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5322. In addition, since the value of the release timer is set to a short time (for example, 1.8 seconds) for opening at the time of small hit, the main control CPU72 usually that the count number has reached a predetermined number in step S5310 In most cases, it is determined in step S5316 that the opening time has ended before confirmation.

  Step S5322: The main control CPU 72 closes the second large winning opening 31b. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the second large winning opening solenoid 97 is stopped. As a result, the second variable winning device 31 returns from the open state to the closed state. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S5324.

  Step S5324: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the specific area passage flag is ON. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 76, and confirms whether the specific area passage flag is ON or not based on whether the value of the specific area passage flag is 01H. As a result of this confirmation, when the specific area passage flag is ON (Yes), that is, when the gaming ball passes the specific area 31x while the second large winning opening 31b in the small hit game is open, the main Control CPU 72 then executes step S5326. On the other hand, when the specific area passage flag is not ON (No), that is, when the game ball does not pass the specific area 31x while the second large winning opening 31b in the small hit game is open, main control The CPU 72 next executes step S5327a. The specific area passage flag may be set to ON in the specific area opening / closing operation process (step S5314).

  Step S5326: The main control CPU 72 executes processing when passing a specific area. In this process, the main control CPU 72 activates the condition device and the feature continuous operation device based on the fact that the game ball passes the specific area 31x while the second large winning opening 31b in the small hit game is open. , A process of continuously operating the first variable winning device 30, ie, a process of starting a big hit game (special game via special game execution means). The specific contents of the process will be described later with reference to another flowchart. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S5328.

  Step S5327a: The main control CPU 72 executes interval standby processing. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes the countdown of the interval timer set in the previous process (step S5265 of the small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (in FIG. 37) step S5265). Then, when the value of the interval timer becomes 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 next proceeds to step S5327b. Although not illustrated here, the main control CPU 72 controls the variable winning device management which is the caller from step S5327a for each interrupt until the interval time elapses (during the interval timer value becomes 0). The end address of the process (FIG. 33) is restored. Then, when the special winning opening / closing operation process is executed at the next call, step S5327a is directly executed, not from the leading step S5310.

  Step S5327 b: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the second large winning opening opening number-of-times counter. The value of the second winning opening open frequency counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76, for example, with an initial value of 0.

  Step S5327c: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the second large winning opening opening number-of-openings counter after increment has reached the number set in the current round. Here, the reason why "the number of times set in the current round" is determined corresponds to, for example, an open pattern in which "the second variable winning device 31 is operated to open a plurality of times during one small hit". It is. It should be noted that, particularly when such an open pattern is not adopted, “the number of times set in the current round” is set once in each round, so the counter value can be set by one opening / closing operation. In order to reach the set number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next proceeds to step S5328.

  On the other hand, in the case of adopting the opening pattern of “opening the second variable winning device 31 a plurality of times during one small hit”, the counter value has reached the set number of times at the end of one opening. It will not be (No). In this case, when the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management processing, since the jump destination is currently set to the special winning opening / closing operation processing, the procedure from step S5310 to step S5327b is repeatedly executed. As a result, incrementing of the release number counter proceeds in step S5327b, and when the counter value reaches the set number (step S5327c; Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5328 next.

  Step S5328: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the special winning opening closing processing, and returns to the special winning opening opening / closing operation processing (FIG. 39). Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, the main control CPU 72 next executes the special winning opening closing process.

[Specific area open / close operation processing]
FIG. 41 is a flowchart of an exemplary procedure of the specific area opening / closing operation process. The contents will be described below along the procedure example.

  Step S5330: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the opening time of the specific area 31x has been started. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the release timer for the release start time regarding the release of the specific region 31x that has been counted down in the countdown process (step S5312) is 0 or not. Check if 31x opening time has started. As a result of this confirmation, when the opening time of the specific area 31x is started (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5332. On the other hand, if the opening time of the specific area 31x has not been started (No), or if the opening time has already been opened, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5334.

  Step S5332: The main control CPU 72 opens the specific area 31x. Specifically, a drive signal to be applied to the specific area solenoid 99 is output. As a result, the specific area slide member 31c is actuated to shift the specific area 31x from the closed state to the open state. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S5334.

  Step S5334: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the gaming ball has passed the specific area 31x. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the storage area of the RAM 76 and confirms whether the specific area reserve flag is ON. As a result of this confirmation, when the specific area reserve flag is ON and it is confirmed that the gaming ball has passed the specific area 31x (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5336. On the other hand, when the specific area reserve flag is OFF and it is confirmed that the gaming ball has not passed the specific area 31x (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5338.

  Step S5336: The main control CPU 72 sets the specific area passage flag to ON. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 76, and sets the value of the specific area passing flag to 01H. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S5338. The specific area passing flag and the specific area reserve flag are reset at the end of the big hit game.

  Step S5338: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time of the specific area 31x has ended. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 checks whether the value of the release timer related to the release of the specific area 31x counted down in the countdown process (step S5312) is 0 or not, and the release time of the specific area 31x is Check if it has finished. As a result of this confirmation, when the release time of the specific area 31x ends (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5340. On the other hand, when the opening time of the specific area 31x has not ended (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the second big winning opening opening / closing operation processing (FIG. 40).

  Step S5340: The main control CPU 72 closes the specific area 31x. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the specific area solenoid 99 is stopped. As a result, the specific area slide member 31c returns from the open state (operating state) to the closed state (non-operating state).

  When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the second big winning opening opening and closing operation processing (FIG. 40).

[Process when passing specific area]
FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure at the time of passage through the specific area. The contents will be described below along the procedure example.

  Step S5350: The main control CPU 72 resets the small hit flag. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 76 and resets the value of the small hit flag to 00H. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S5352.

  Step S5352: The main control CPU 72 ends the small hit game. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 deletes "in small hit game" from the internal state flag, and ends the small hit game in the control process (small hit end). Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S5354.

  Step S5354: The main control CPU 72 activates the condition device and the character continuous actuation device. Thereby, the first variable winning device 30 can be operated continuously, and a big hit game can be started. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S5356.

  Step S5356: The main control CPU 72 sets “big bonus start (big hit game in progress)” as an internal state flag in control. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the continuous operation number status according to the type of the winning symbol. In the present embodiment, the value representing “16 rounds” is set in the continuous operation number status regardless of the type of the winning symbol. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a state command representing a big hit. A state command representing a big hit is sent to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S5358.

  Step S5358: The main control CPU 72 executes the pattern-by-design opening pattern selection process when passing the specific area. In this process, the main control CPU 72 refers to the pattern-by-design opening pattern setting table when passing the specific area, and selects the opening pattern corresponding to the type of the winning symbol when it corresponds to the small hit. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S5360.

  Step S5360: The main control CPU 72 sets the operation of the first variable winning device 30. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 is a variable winning device that is operated every round (two rounds to the last round) during the big hit game based on the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol for the special symbol when it is a small hit. The type is set to the first variable winning device 30. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S5362.

  Step S5362: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of rounds to be executed during the big hit game on the basis of the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol related to the special symbol when it is a small hit. In the present embodiment, 16 rounds are set as the number of execution rounds of the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbols (the fourth winning symbol to the sixth winning symbol) relating to the special symbols when all small hits are met. The main control CPU 72 next executes step S5364.

  Step S5364: The main control CPU 72 sets a big hit open timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets an opening time (opening timer) per opening at the time of opening the big winning opening for each round at the time of big hit. In the present embodiment, it is set for each round based on the opening time of the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbols (the fourth winning symbol to the sixth winning symbol) related to the special symbols when they correspond to the small hit. For example, in the case of the fourth winning symbol, the opening time for opening the first large winning opening 30b is set to 29.0 seconds for the round with balls, and the first large winning hole 30b for the round without balls. The release time to release the is set to 0.5 seconds. Therefore, if about 29.0 seconds is set as the value of the opening timer, the opening time is a sufficient time for the ball to easily enter the first large winning opening 30b during one opening (for example, shooting) It is a time during which ten or more gaming balls are fired by the control board set 174 (preferably, six seconds or more). On the other hand, if about 0.5 seconds are set as the value of the opening timer, the opening time is a time when it is difficult to enter the first large winning opening 30b during one opening. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S5366.

  Step S5366: The main control CPU 72 sets a big hit time interval timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a standby time (interval timer) between rounds at the time of a big hit. In this embodiment, as an interval timer of the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbols (the fourth winning symbol to the sixth winning symbol) related to the special symbols when it corresponds to the small hit 1.0 second (out ball no round) Is set to 5.0 seconds). For example, after the opening of the first large winning opening 30b between the second round and the third round is finished and once closed, an interval timer of about 1.0 second is set. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S5368.

  Step S5368: The main control CPU 72 generates a continuous operation number command. The continuous operation number command can be generated based on the number of execution rounds set in the previous process (step S5362). Therefore, based on the execution round number "16R" of the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol (the fourth winning symbol to the sixth winning symbol) for the special symbol when it corresponds to the small hit, the continuous operation number command is "16 rounds" A value representing is generated. The generated continuous operation number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S5370.

  Step S5370: The main control CPU 72 executes the time-specific pattern shortening function setting process when passing a specific area. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets the time shortening function activation flag to ON when the winning symbols relating to the special symbols at the time of the small hit correspond to “four winning symbols” to “six winning symbols”. Short state transition means, time shortening function operation means). In the present embodiment, when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x corresponding to "fourth winning symbol" to "sixth winning symbol", the time reduction state is always made. Only the winning symbol may be shifted to the time shortening state.

  When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the second big winning opening opening and closing operation processing (FIG. 40).

[When passing through a specific area open pattern setting table by symbol]
FIG. 43 is a diagram showing an example of an open pattern setting table for each symbol when passing a specific area. The specific area passing pattern-by-pattern opening pattern setting table defines the opening / closing operation pattern of the first variable winning device 30 for each round for different winning symbols relating to the special symbol when it corresponds to a small hit. Specifically, the opening pattern of the following special winning opening is determined for each winning symbol.

[Fourth winning symbol]
When the game ball passes the specific area 31x corresponding to the fourth winning symbol, the type of the variable winning device to be operated is the first variable winning device 30. Also, the number of execution rounds is sixteen. In addition, since the number of execution rounds includes the operation of the second variable winning device 31 opened with a small hit, in the big hit game to be started from now on, 15 rounds for which one round is subtracted from 16 rounds It becomes the number of rounds in a substantial big hit game (hereinafter, the same applies to the fifth winning symbol and the sixth winning symbol). In addition, 5 out of 15 rounds are rounds with ball. And the opening time which open | releases the 1st big winning a prize mouth 30b per round in a round with a ball is 29.0 seconds. Moreover, the interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

  As described above, when the winning symbol relating to the special symbol corresponding to the small hit is the fourth winning symbol, when the big hit game is started, the opening of the second variable winning device 31 in the small hit is taken as the first round. Therefore, from the second round to the sixth round, the first variable winning device 30 is activated during each round for 29.0 seconds, and the first big winning opening 30b is opened. Therefore, when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x corresponding to the fourth winning symbol, it is possible to substantially obtain five rounds of balls.

[The fifth winning symbol]
When the game ball passes through the specific area 31x corresponding to the fifth winning symbol, the type of the variable winning device to be operated is the first variable winning device 30. In addition, the number of execution rounds is 16 rounds (the number of rounds in a substantial big hit game is 15 rounds), and 10 rounds among them are rounds with ball games. And the opening time which open | releases the 1st big winning a prize opening 30b per round in a round with a ball is 29.0 seconds, and the opening time in the round without a ball is 0.5 second. Moreover, the interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second (5.0 seconds between rounds without balls).

  As described above, when the winning symbol relating to the special symbol corresponding to the small hit is the fifth winning symbol, when the big hit game is started, the opening of the second variable winning device 31 in the small hit is set as the first round. Therefore, the first variable winning apparatus 30 is operated during each round for 29.0 seconds from the second round to the eleventh round, and the first large winning opening 30b is opened, and the first variable winning apparatus 30 is opened from the twelfth round to the sixteenth round. 1 The variable winning device 30 opens for 0.5 seconds. Therefore, when the game ball passes through the specific area corresponding to the fifth winning symbol, it is possible to obtain 10 rounds of balls.

[The sixth winning symbol]
When the game ball passes the specific area 31x corresponding to the sixth winning symbol, the type of the variable winning device to be operated is the first variable winning device 30. Moreover, the number of execution rounds is 16 rounds (the number of rounds in a substantial big hit game is 15 rounds), and 15 rounds among them are rounds with ball games. Then, the opening time for opening the first big winning opening 30b per round in the round with the ball is 29.0 seconds, and the interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

  As described above, when the winning symbol relating to the special symbol corresponding to the small hit is the sixth winning symbol, when the big hit game is started, the first variable winning device 30 performs 29. The first big winning opening 30b is opened during each round for 0 seconds. Therefore, when the game ball passes through the specific area corresponding to the sixth winning symbol, it is possible to obtain 15 rounds of balls.

  As described above, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening pattern of the special winning opening corresponding to the type of the winning symbol regarding the special symbol when it corresponds to the small hit referring to the opening pattern setting table by symbol when passing the specific area It will be done.

[First big winning opening opening and closing operation processing]
FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the first big winning opening / closing operation process. Hereinafter, description will be made along the procedure example.

  Step S5380: The main control CPU 72 opens the first large winning opening 30b. Specifically, a drive signal to be applied to the first large winning opening solenoid 90 is output. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 operates to shift from the closed state to the open state. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S5382.

  Step S5382: The main control CPU 72 executes an open timer countdown process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 is set in the previous process (step S5220 of the big hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (in FIG. 35), or step S5364 of the specific area passing process (in FIG. 42)) Execute open timer countdown. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S5386.

  Step S5386: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time of the first large winning opening 30b has ended. Specifically, it is checked whether or not the value of the release timer for the first special winning opening 30b after the countdown process is 0 or less. As a result of this confirmation, when the opening time of the first large winning opening 30b is ended (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5392. On the other hand, when the opening time of the first special winning opening 30b has not ended (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5388.

  Step S5388: The main control CPU 72 executes a winning ball number counting process. In this process, the number of gaming balls that have won in the first variable winning device 30 (a large winning opening in an open) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the value of the count number based on the winning detection signal inputted from the first count switch 84 within the opening time. The main control CPU 72 next executes step S5390.

  Step S5390: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (10). The predetermined number defines the upper limit (upper limit of winning balls) of the number of winning balls allowed per opening (one round during a big hit) as described above. If the count number has not reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process. Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, since the jump destination is currently set to the large winning opening opening and closing operation process at this stage, the main control CPU 72 repeatedly executes the procedure of step S5380 to step S5390 described above.

  If it is determined in step S5386 that the open time has ended (Yes), or if it is confirmed in step S5390 that the count number has reached the predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5392. In addition, when the ball is not released and the value of the release timer is set to a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds) at the time of big hit and no release ball, the main control CPU 72 normally counts at step S5390. In most cases, it is determined in step S5386 that the release time has ended before it is confirmed that the predetermined number has been reached.

  Step S5392: The main control CPU 72 closes the first large winning opening 30b. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the first big winning opening solenoid 90 is stopped. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 returns from the open state to the closed state. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S5394.

  Step S5394: The main control CPU 72 executes interval standby processing. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 is set in the previous process (step S5222 of the big hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (in FIG. 35) or step S5366 of the process when passing a specific area (in FIG. 42)). Execute interval timer countdown. Then, when the value of the interval timer becomes 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 next proceeds to step S5395. Although not illustrated here, the main control CPU 72 controls the variable winning device management which is the caller from step S5394 at each interrupt until the interval time elapses (during the interval timer value becomes 0). The end address of the process (FIG. 33) is restored. Then, when the special winning opening / closing operation process is executed in the next call, step S5394 is directly executed instead of the first step S5380.

  Step S5395: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the opening number counter. The value of the release number counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76, for example, with an initial value of 0.

  Step S5396: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the release number counter after increment has reached the number set in the current round. Here, the reason that "the number of times set in the current round" is determined corresponds to, for example, an open pattern in which "the first variable winning device 30 is operated to open a plurality of times in one round during a big hit". It is. Note that, in the present embodiment, such an open pattern is not adopted in particular, so the “number of times set in the current round” is set once in each round. Therefore, since the counter value normally reaches the set number of times in one opening / closing operation (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S5398 next.

  When the pattern in which the opening and closing operations are repeated a plurality of times in one round is adopted as described above, the counter value has not reached the set number of times at the end of one opening (No). In this case, when the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management processing, since the jump destination is currently set to the special winning opening opening / closing operation processing, the procedure from step S5380 to step S5390 is repeatedly executed. As a result, incrementing of the release number counter proceeds in step S5395, and when the counter value reaches the set number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S5398.

  Step S5398: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the special winning opening closing processing, and returns to the special winning opening opening / closing operation processing (FIG. 39). Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, the main control CPU 72 next executes the special winning opening closing process.

[Big winning opening closing processing]
FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the special winning opening closing process. The special winning opening closing process is for continuing the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 or ending the operation. Hereinafter, the procedure will be described.

  Step S5401: First, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the current game is in a big game (big hit game). If the current game is in a big game (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5402.

  Step S5402: The main control CPU 72 increments the above round number counter. Thereby, for example, the value of the round number counter becomes “1” at the stage when the first round is finished and the second round is started. In addition, when the game ball passes the specific area 31x during the small hit game and the big hit game is started after the end of the small hit, the opening of the second big winning opening 31b at the small hit is treated as the first round, the big hit The first round when the game is started is treated as the second round.

  Step S5404: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the round number counter after increment has reached the set number of execution rounds. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value (1 to 15) of the round number counter after increment, and if the value is less than the set number of execution rounds (14 or 15 after one subtraction) ( No) Next, step S5405 is performed.

  Step S5405: The main control CPU 72 generates a round number command from the current value of the round number counter. This command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process as described above. The effect control device 124 can check the current number of rounds based on the received round number command.

  Step S5406: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the special winning opening / closing operation process.

  Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter, and returns to the variable winning device management process.

  Next, when the main control CPU 72 executes the variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 executes the next winning destination, the winning opening opening / closing operation process in the gaming process selection process (step S5100 in FIG. 33). After execution of the special winning opening / closing operation process, the main winning CPU closing process is performed again, and the main control CPU 72 executes the special winning opening closing process again, and repeatedly executes steps S5402 to S5408 described above. Thus, the opening and closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 is continuously executed until the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds (15 times or 16 times).

  If the actual number of rounds has reached the set number of execution rounds (step S5404: YES), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5410 next.

  Steps S5410 and S5412: In this case, when the round number counter is reset (= 0), the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination as the end process.

  Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter, and returns to the variable winning device management process. As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the end process is selected this time.

[When small hit]
On the other hand, in the case of a small hit, the procedure is as follows (special operation execution means).
Step S5411: When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the current game is not playing a big game (Step S5401: No), it increments the value of the number-of-openings counter.

  Step S5413: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the release number counter after increment has reached the set release number. The number of times of opening is set in the previous small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5258 in FIG. 37). If the value of the release number counter has not yet reached the set release number (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5416.

Step S5416: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the special winning opening / closing operation process.
Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter, and returns to the variable winning device management process.

  Next, when the main control CPU 72 executes the variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 executes the next winning destination, the winning opening opening / closing operation process in the gaming process selection process (step S5100 in FIG. 33). Then, after the execution of the special winning opening opening and closing operation processing, through the execution of the special winning opening closing processing, the main control CPU72 executes the special winning opening closing processing again, through the above step S5401 to step S5413 (No), step S5416 Step S5408 is repeatedly executed. Thus, the opening and closing operation of the second variable winning device 31 is repeatedly executed until the actual number of times of opening reaches the set number of times of opening.

  If the actual number of times of opening at the time of the small hit has reached the set number of times of opening (step S5413: YES), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5414.

  Step S5414, Step S5412: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets the open number counter (= 0), it sets the next jump destination as the end processing.

  Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter, and returns to the variable winning device management process. As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the end process is selected this time.

〔End processing〕
FIG. 46 is a flowchart of an exemplary procedure of the termination process. This end process is for adjusting the condition when the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is ended. Hereinafter, description will be made along the procedure example.

  Step S5502: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value (01H) of the big hit flag is set, and if the value of the big hit flag is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5503 next. Do.

  Steps S5503 and S5504: In this case, the main control CPU 72 resets the big hit flag (00H). As a result, the big hit gaming state ends on the control processing of the main control CPU 72. In addition, the main control CPU 72 deletes “big hit” from the internal state flag, and ends the big hit game in the control process (big end). The main control CPU 72 resets the value of the continuous operation number status.

  Step S5510: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the time shortening function operation flag is 01H (is set). This flag is the setting process (step S2414 in FIG. 17) of the big hit during the special symbol variation pre-processing above, or the time shortening function setting processing according to design when passing the specific area during the above specific area passing processing (figure 42 is set in step S5370).

  Step S5512: Then, if the value of the time shortening function activation flag is 01H (step S5510: YES), the main control CPU 72 sets the time reduction number (for example, 4 times (or 8 times)). The value of the set number of times is stored in the time count area of the RAM 76 as described above. The time reduction number set here is the upper limit number for shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the subsequent games. In the present embodiment, in order to manage the number of times of time saving, a count counter value (first count counter value, second count counter value) relating to two types of time shortening state is prepared. Here, the first number cut counter value is a variable that is decremented (subtracted by one) each time the second special symbol changes once, and "4" is set as an initial value. The second number-of-times-counting counter value is a variable that is decremented each time the first special symbol or the second special symbol changes once, and "8" is set as an initial value. If the value of the time shortening function activation flag is not 01H (step S5510: NO), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S5512.

  By executing such processing, when the transition condition to the time reduction state is satisfied (when winning by the winning symbol to be transferred to the time reduction state), the main control CPU 72 does not have time after the end of the big hit game. Favorable conditions were applied compared with the non-time shortening state from the shortening state (predetermined game state) (Normal fluctuation time of the symbol lottery is shortened and the opening time of the variable start winning device is extended) time shortening It is possible to shift to a state (advantage game state) (advantage game state transition means).

  Step S5513: The main control CPU 72 sets a first remaining number command and a second remaining number command respectively from the initial values of the first number cutting counter value and the second number cutting counter value set in the previous step S5512. As described above, the command is described in a 2-byte format, and here “04H” corresponding to the initial value as the subsequent value for each leading value (upper byte) representing the first remaining number command and the second remaining number command. , "08H" are set respectively.

  The procedure up to here is the case of a big hit, but in the case of a small hit (step S5502: No), the following procedure is executed.

  Steps S5520 and S5522: In the case of a small hit, the main control CPU 72 resets the value of the small hit flag (00H), and deletes "small hit in game" from the internal state flag. In the case of a small hit, in particular, the internal condition device does not operate, such a procedure is merely intended to erase the flag.

  Step S5514: The main control CPU 72 then generates a state designation command based on the flag. Specifically, in response to the resetting of the jackpot flag or the end of the winning combination, a state designation command representing "normally medium" is generated as the gaming state. Further, if the time shortening function activation flag is set, a state designation command indicating "during time reduction" is generated as an internal state. These state designation commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  Step S5515: The main control CPU 72 executes special variation count setting processing. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting a variation pattern selection counter value based on the type of the winning symbol. The contents of the special variation count setting process will be described later with reference to another drawing.

  Step S5516: After the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination in the special winning opening opening pattern setting process.

  Step S5518: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 16) in the special symbol game process as the special symbol variation pre-processing. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process.

[Game flow (1)]
FIG. 47 is a view for explaining the game flow developed when the first special symbol changes in the normal mode.
When starting the game with the pachinko machine 1, the game is started from the [F1] normal mode (park mode). The “normal mode” is the “low probability non-time shortening state”, the winning probability of the special symbol is the “low probability state”, and the winning probability of the normal symbol is the “low probability state”.

  [F1] When the game ball enters the middle start winning opening 26 during the game in the normal mode (when the memory of the second special symbol is present, the memory of the first special symbol is present) ), [F2] the first special symbol changes.

  [F3] When it becomes "off" in the first special symbol lottery, [F1] it will be redone from the state of the normal mode.

  [F4] The first special symbol lottery will be "big hit (winning probability 1/224)", and if it corresponds to the [F5] first winning symbol, [F6] big hit game will be executed, but it will shift to [F1] normal mode Do.

  [F4] In the first special symbol lottery, when it becomes "big hit (winning probability 1/224)" and it corresponds to the [F7] second winning symbol, [F6] big hit game is executed, and it shifts to [F8] drive mode. [F8] The drive mode is the “low probability time shortening state”, the winning probability of the special symbol is the “low probability state”, and the winning probability of the normal symbol is the “high probability state”.

[Game flow (2)]
FIG. 48 is a diagram for explaining the game flow developed when the second special symbol changes in the normal mode.
[F1] If the game ball enters the right start winning opening 28b during the game in the normal mode (if the memory of the second special symbol exists), the [F12] second special symbol fluctuates.

  [F13] When the second special symbol lottery results in "off", the state of the [F1] normal mode is redone.

  [F14] In the second special symbol lottery, when it becomes "big hit (winning probability 1/224)" and it corresponds to the [F15] third winning symbol, [F6] big hit game is executed, and it shifts to [F8] drive mode.

  [F16] in the second special symbol lottery "small hit (winning probability 1/4)", and [F17] corresponds to the fourth winning symbol, [F18] when the game ball passes a specific area during the small hit game, [F6] A big hit game is executed, and it shifts to [F8] drive mode.

  [F16] in the second special symbol lottery "small hit (winning probability 1/4)", and [F19] corresponds to the fifth winning symbol, [F18] when the game ball passes a specific area during the small hit game, [F6] A big hit game is executed, and it shifts to [F8] drive mode.

  [F16] in the second special symbol lottery "small hit (winning probability 1/4)", and [F20] corresponds to the sixth winning symbol, [F18] when the game ball passes a specific area during the small hit game, [F6] A big hit game is executed, and it shifts to [F8] drive mode.

[Game flow (3)]
FIG. 49 is a diagram for explaining the game flow developed when the first special symbol changes in the drive mode.
[F8] When the game ball enters the middle starting winning opening 26 during the game in the drive mode (when the memory of the second special symbol is present, the memory of the first special symbol is present) ), [F2] the first special symbol changes.

  [F3] When it becomes "off" in the first special symbol lottery, the state of the [F8] drive mode is redone. However, if it is a short final change when the time reduction state ends, the transition to the normal mode is made by the end of the deviation change.

  [F4] In the first special symbol lottery, when it becomes "big hit (winning probability 1/224)" and it corresponds to the [F5] first winning symbol, [F6] big hit game is executed, and it shifts to the [F8] drive mode.

  [F4] In the first special symbol lottery, when it becomes "big hit (winning probability 1/224)" and it corresponds to the [F7] second winning symbol, [F6] big hit game is executed, and it shifts to [F8] drive mode.

  As described above, when the player is in the drive mode (time reduction state) and the jackpot occurs in the first special symbol lottery, the drive mode after the end of the jackpot game regardless of what kind of winning symbol it corresponds to. Migrate to

[Game flow (4)]
FIG. 50 is a view for explaining the game flow developed when the second special symbol changes in the drive mode.
[F8] If the game ball enters the right start winning opening 28b during the game in the drive mode (if the memory of the second special symbol is present), the [F12] second special symbol fluctuates.

  [F13] When it becomes "off" in the second special symbol lottery, it will be redone from the state of [F8] drive mode. However, if it is a short final change when the time reduction state ends, the transition to the normal mode is made by the end of the deviation change.

  [F14] In the second special symbol lottery, when it becomes "big hit (winning probability 1/224)" and it corresponds to the [F15] third winning symbol, [F6] big hit game is executed, and it shifts to [F8] drive mode.

  [F16] in the second special symbol lottery "small hit (winning probability 1/4)", and [F17] corresponds to the fourth winning symbol, [F18] when the game ball passes a specific area during the small hit game, [F6] A big hit game is executed, and it shifts to [F8] drive mode.

  [F16] in the second special symbol lottery "small hit (winning probability 1/4)", and [F19] corresponds to the fifth winning symbol, [F18] when the game ball passes a specific area during the small hit game, [F6] A big hit game is executed, and it shifts to [F8] drive mode.

  [F16] in the second special symbol lottery "small hit (winning probability 1/4)", and [F20] corresponds to the sixth winning symbol, [F18] when the game ball passes a specific area during the small hit game, [F6] A big hit game is executed, and it shifts to [F8] drive mode.

  In this way, when winning in the second special symbol lottery, even after staying in the normal mode (non-time shortening state) or staying in the drive mode (time shortening state), after the end of the big hit game , Shift to drive mode.

[Example of effect image]
Next, the effect image actually displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 in the pachinko machine 1 and the operation of the drum unit 200 will be described with some examples. As described above, when a big hit internal lottery is performed in the pachinko machine 1, the variation pattern (variation time) is determined under the control of the main control CPU 72, and the variation display by the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed. (Symbol display means). However, as described above, since the first special symbol and the second special symbol themselves are displayed on the 7-segment LED, they have poor appeal in appearance. Similarly, the stop display mode of the first special symbol or the second special symbol by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 is also a symbolic design by a 7-segment LED or the like. Poor visual impact as a winning symbol. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the variable display effect and the stop display effect using the liquid crystal display 42 and the drum unit 200 are performed.

  In the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display 42 displays the effect symbol Hz (this symbol), the marker M1, the marker M2, the fourth symbol Z1 and Z2, the background image corresponding to the stay mode, the image regarding the notice effect, etc. The drum unit 200 displays a pseudo rendering symbol such as 7 symbols.

  The effect symbol Hz displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 includes, for example, the left effect pattern, the middle effect pattern, and the right effect pattern. These are left, middle, and right on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. Displayed side by side. The numbers "1" to "9" are displayed on each of the effect symbols. Here, the left rendering symbol, the middle rendering symbol, and the right rendering symbol constitute a symbol row (rendering symbol array) in which the numbers are arranged in the descending order of “9” to “1”. Such symbol rows are displayed so as to flow (scroll) in the vertical direction.

  In the simulated effect symbols displayed on the drum unit 200, there are three simulated left effect symbols displayed on the left reel 201, a simulated effect effect symbol displayed on the middle reel 202, and a simulated right effect symbol displayed on the right reel 203. These are displayed side by side in the left, middle and right on the display area of the drum unit 200. Each reel includes seven symbols, a panda symbol, and a cherry symbol, and by rotating each reel, the pseudo effect symbol is variably displayed.

  FIG. 51 and FIG. 52 are continuous views showing an example of the effect image corresponding to the variable display and the stop display of the special symbol. In addition, about the fluctuation of the special symbol at the time of non-winning (deterioration) here, an example of the fluctuation display production performed using the liquid crystal display 42 and the drum unit 200 and the stop display production is shown. The variable display effect corresponds to a series of effects performed between the start of the variable display of the special symbol (here, the first special symbol) and the stop display (including the decision stop). In addition, the stop display effect is an effect representing that the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the result of the internal lottery at that time is displayed. Here, first, before describing the specific content of the control process, a basic flow of the variable display effect for each fluctuation and the stop display effect adopted in the present embodiment will be described.

[Before fluctuating display]
In FIG. 51 (A): For example, in a state before the first special symbol starts to change (state not under demonstration effect), a row of three effect symbols Hz appears in the lower right region of the liquid crystal display 42. It is displayed. At this time, in accordance with the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the effect pattern Hz is also in the state of being stopped and displayed.

  Also, in the lower left area of the liquid crystal display 42, markers representing the number of stored workings of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (marks M1 and M2 in the figure are displayed) will be displayed ing. The markers M1 and M2 indicate the number of operating memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol corresponding to the respective displayed numbers (the number of display of the first special symbol operating memory lamp 34a and the second special symbol operating memory lamp 35a) The displayed number also increases or decreases in conjunction with a change in the number of activated memories in the game. Also, in the markers M1 and M2, the marker M1 corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed, for example, as a circle (o) to facilitate visual discrimination, and the marker M2 corresponding to the second special symbol is, for example, a heart It is displayed in the form of. In the illustrated example, all four markers M1 are lit to indicate that the number of working memories of the first special symbol is four, and all the markers M2 are not displayed (indicated by broken lines). The second special symbol indicates that the number of working memories is 0.

  In the lower right area of the liquid crystal display 42, a fourth symbol (the reference symbols Z1 and Z2 are given in the drawing) is displayed. The fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are the "fourth effect symbols" following the left, middle and right effect symbols described above, and are variably displayed in synchronization with the variation symbols of the effect symbols Hz. Note that the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are merely simple colors (for example, a figure of “□”) with a color, and for example, it is possible to express variable display by changing the display color. The fourth symbol Z1 corresponds to the first special symbol, and the fourth symbol Z2 corresponds to the second special symbol.

  In addition, the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the detachment. This is for performing stop display production correctly corresponding to the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and for objectively clarifying that the pachinko machine 1 is operating normally. It is a thing. Therefore, if the result of the internal lottery is actually "big hit" or "small hit" instead of "off", the fourth symbol Z1, Z2 in the mode (for example, blue display color, red display color, etc.) corresponding to them. Is stopped.

  On the other hand, on the middle effective line of the drum unit 200, a "panda symbol" corresponding to "off" is displayed.

[Variation display production start]
(B) in FIG. 51: For example, while each reel of the drum unit 200 starts to rotate in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 scrolls and fluctuates. Is started (design effect execution means). In the drawing, the fluctuation display of the pseudo rendering symbol of the drum unit 200 and the fluctuation display of the rendering symbol Hz are simply displayed by the downward arrow.

  A background image is displayed in the central region of the liquid crystal display 42, and this background image represents a landscape of a park. Such a background image expresses that the stay mode on presentation is, for example, the “normal mode”. The "normal mode" is a low probability non-time shortening state. In addition to this, various modes are provided in effect, and background images having different landscapes and scenes are prepared for each mode. The difference between these modes corresponds to the internal "time saving state". Although not particularly illustrated here, after that, for example, an image such as a character or an item may be displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 to perform an advance notice effect.

  In addition, during fluctuation display of the production design Hz, the fourth design Z1 is fluctuated and displayed in the lower part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the fourth design Z1 expresses the fluctuation display by changing its display color .

[Left production pattern stop]
(C) in FIG. 51: For example, when a certain amount of time (about half the fluctuation time) elapses, first, the pseudo left effect design pattern of the left reel 201 of the drum unit 200 and the left effect of the effect pattern Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 The symbol stops changing. In this example, "7 symbols of green" are stopped at the middle position of the left reel 201 of the drum unit 200 as a pseudo left effect symbol, and the numeral "8" is left as a left effect symbol of the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42. The effect pattern to represent is stopped.

[Example of effect when working memory number decreases]
Here, as shown in (B) in FIG. 51 above, the number of working memories of the oldest first special symbol decreases by one with the start of fluctuation, so the leftmost position is interlocked with it. The number of displayed markers M1 is reduced by one. That is, although a total of four activated memory numbers of the marker M1 have been present by that time, the marker M1, which is the display of the earliest (oldest) memory number, is not displayed, and the effects consumed by the internal lottery It will be. This makes it possible to teach the player that the total number of working memories has decreased to three even on presentation, and working memories corresponding to any special symbol (in this case, the first special symbol) are consumed. It can be taught clearly.

  Then, in the example of (C) in FIG. 51, since the working memory at the top in the memory order is consumed and the remaining three become, three markers M1 remaining on the screen are respectively one by one. An effect of shifting in the direction (here, the left direction) is performed. Thus, the context of the change in the number of working memories can be accurately expressed on the stage, and the player can be taught intuitively that "the working memory has been consumed and one has been reduced". it can.

[Right production pattern stop]
In FIG. 52 (D): Next, “Panda pattern” is stopped at the middle position of the right reel 203 of the drum unit 200 as a pseudo right effect pattern, and the number of the right effect pattern of the effect pattern Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 is shown. The effect pattern representing "3" has stopped.

[Stop indication effect]
(E) in FIG. 52: The stop display effect is executed in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. If the result of the internal lottery this time is non-winning, and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the non-winning mode, the simulated effect pattern of the drum unit 200 and the effect pattern Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 are also the same. The stop display effect is performed in a non-winning (or losing) mode. That is, in the illustrated example, the "panda symbol" is stopped at the middle position of the middle reel 202 of the drum unit 200 as a simulated middle effect symbol, and the numeral "1" is displayed as a middle effect symbol of the display symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42. The representational symbol representing has stopped. In this case, the combination of the pseudo effect symbols displayed on the middle effective line of the drum unit 200 is the “7 symbols of green”-“panda symbol”-“panda symbol”, and the effect symbol of the liquid crystal display 42 Since the combination of Hz is a break of “8”-“1”-“3”, it is expressed in the effect that the present fluctuation corresponds to a normal “break”. At this time, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the detachment.

  The above is an example of the variable display effect and the stop display effect (at the time of non-winning) performed for each change once. Through such an effect, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation for winning and finally to clearly teach the result of the internal lottery on the effect.

[Example of production at the time of big hit]
FIGS. 53 to 55 are continuous views showing the flow of the reach effect performed at the time of the big hit. Here, in addition to the reach effect, it is assumed that the variable display effect, the stop display effect and the notice effect are included. In addition, an example of the notice effect (notice effect before reach occurrence, notice effect after reach effect) to be executed during the variable display effect will be described.

  In the following reach effects, after the variation display according to the variation pattern at the time of a big hit is performed in the first special symbol display device 34, for example, the first special symbol is a form of "first winning symbol" or "second winning symbol" (For example, it is executed until it is stopped and displayed by “self”, “Yo”, “mouth”, “巳”, “F”, “E”, “L”, “Γ”, etc. of 7-segment LED) Reach production execution means).

[Variable display effect]
(A) in FIG. 53: Each reel of the drum unit 200 starts to rotate substantially in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol (or the second special symbol), and the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 is scrolled. By doing this, the variable display effect is started.

[Notice production before reach occurrence (the first stage)]
(B) in FIG. 53: When a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of fluctuation, in the liquid crystal display 42, a notice effect before reaching the first stage of reach is performed using the graphic image (picture card) of the character. The pre-reach advance notice effect is a pre-order effect in which a change in aspect progresses in stages from one step to a plurality of steps (for example, 2 to 5 steps) in accordance with a predetermined order. The design image used in the notice effect before the reach occurrence is displayed as it appears from the left end of the screen (may be another appearance aspect). In addition, "pre-reach occurrence advance notice" is an effect of giving notice of the possibility of reach and the possibility of a big hit. By executing such “reach advance notice production”, an effect of having the player a sense of expectation that “the reach may be developed = the possibility of a big hit is increased” can be obtained.

[Notice production before reach occurrence (the second stage)]
(C) in FIG. 53: After the first stage aspect of the advance notice generation before the reach occurrence is executed, subsequently, the change of the aspect of the preliminary announcement effect before the reach generation progresses to the second stage. Here, as the advance notice production before reaching the second stage reach, production using a pattern image of a character different from the previous one is performed. Specifically, another pattern image appears additionally from the right end of the screen, and is displayed so as to overlap the front of the previously displayed pattern image. Also, the design image displayed at this time is larger in size than the design image displayed earlier. And, the effect by the acoustic output that the character expressed by the design image emits a line (for example, "I become reach" etc.) is also performed together.

  The prior notice effect for reaching the second stage (second stage) using such a second design image is one step ahead from the preliminary announcement effect for the first stage of reach (first stage) performed in (B) in FIG. It is an evolutionary type. In general, the term "step-up notice" or the like may be used to refer to the aspect of "pre-reach advance notice effect" that develops in this manner. Here, an example is given in which the second step pattern image appears in the notice effect before the reach occurrence, but in the effect mode, the third step, fourth step, and fifth step pattern images appear and appear one after another. It may be. Further, for example, each time the design images of the third, fourth and fifth stages appear and appear one after another, the size may be enlarged. Note that the variable display effect is continued even at this stage. In any case, it is possible to suggest to the player that there is a high probability (expected degree) of becoming a big hit in the present change by advancing the change of the mode of the advance notice generation before reaching the reach to more stages. (For example, progress to the 5th stage suggests the highest degree of expectation etc.).

[Stop of left production pattern]
In (D) of FIG. 54, when the middle stage of the variable display effect is approached, the pseudo left effect design symbol of the left reel 201 of the drum unit 200 and the left effect design symbol of the effect design symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 stop changing. In this example, "7 symbols of red" is stopped at the middle position of the left reel 201 of the drum unit 200 as a pseudo left effect symbol, and the number "7" is left as a left effect symbol of the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42. The effect pattern to represent is stopped.

[Occurrence of reach condition]
(E) in FIG. 54: Then, the pseudo right effect design symbol of the right reel 203 of the drum unit 200 and the right effect symbol of the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 stop changing. In this example, “7 symbols of red” are stopped at the middle position of the right reel 203 of the drum unit 200 as a pseudo right rendering symbol, and the number “7” is displayed as a right rendering symbol of the rendering symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42. The effect pattern to represent is stopped. Thereby, in the pseudo effect pattern of the drum unit 200, the reach state of "7 symbols of red"-"during variation"-"7 symbols of red" is generated, and in the effect pattern Hz of the liquid crystal display 42, "7 A "reaching" condition has occurred. In addition, an effect of outputting a voice such as "reach!" Is also performed. After the reach state occurs, reach effect at the time of winning is executed. With regard to the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42, a display state of "during variation"-"during variation"-"during variation" may be made without generating a clear reach condition.

[Notice production after reach occurrence]
(F) in FIG. 54: When reach condition occurs for a while, in the liquid crystal display 42, for example, the notice effect after reach occurrence in which images representing figures of "heart" form a group and obliquely pass on the screen To be done. In this case, since the image of "heart group" is suddenly displayed on the screen as it flows, this can enhance the visual appeal for the player. Performing such a notice operation after the occurrence of such a lively reach has the effect of making the player have a greater sense of expectation.

[Progress of reach production]
In (G) in FIG. 55, after reaching the occurrence of the reach, following the notice effect, “Ghost of the pumpkin” appears as an enemy character on the left side of the screen on the liquid crystal display 42, and “male character as an ally character” on the right side of the screen. "" Appears and the effect that the character "VS" appears in the center of the screen is performed.

  In FIG. 55 (H): At the end of the reach production, the “Ghost of pumpkin” delivers countless punches, and the production where “male character” responds with a chop is performed. In this state, if a "male character" wins, it will be a big hit, and if a "male character" loses, it will be off.

[Stop indication effect (effect when winning)]
In FIG. 55 (I): “Male character” is displayed in a large size together with the characters “win !!”, and “a ghost of a pumpkin” is displayed in a small size, which means that it is a big hit. Then, substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the special symbol, the simulated effect symbol of the middle reel 202 of the drum unit 200 and the intermediate effect symbol of the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 stop fluctuating. In this example, "7 symbols of red" are stopped at the middle position of the middle reel 202 of the drum unit 200 as a pseudo right rendering symbol, and the number "7" is displayed as a middle rendering symbol of the rendering symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42. The effect pattern to represent is stopped. The fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, red display color) corresponding to the big hit.

  At the time of non-winning (when lost), the words "defeat · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·" "pumpkin pumpkin ghost" "is displayed large," male character "is displayed small. In this case, the "panda symbol" is stopped as a pseudo right effect symbol at the middle position of the middle reel 202 of the drum unit 200, and the effect representing a number other than "7" as the effect symbol of the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 The symbol is stopped.

[During production]
56 to 59 are continuous views partially showing an example of the in-game effect performed during the big hit game. In addition, the following in-game effects are effects performed by the liquid crystal display 42.

[Big hit game start]
56A (A): When the big hit game is started, for example, character information such as "BIG BONUS" is displayed on the screen, and a unique effect image (for example, a female character) is displayed during the big hit game. .

("Right-handed" display during a major role)
Further, in the present embodiment, since the first variable winning device 30 is disposed on the right side in the game area 8a, the right side in the game area 8a is designated as the launch position (launch direction) of the game ball during a major game. It is supposed to be. Therefore, the above-mentioned emission position designation display lamp 38f is lit and displayed under the control of the main control CPU 72, and an emission position designation command representing "right-handed" is transmitted to the effect control device 124. In response to this, guidance information (an arrow indicating a right direction, characters of “right strike”, etc.) for prompting “right strike” is displayed on the display screen under effect control by the effect control CPU 126).

[1st round]
(B) in FIG. 56: When the first round of the big hit game is started, for example, five 印 marks are displayed along with character information of “BIG BONUS” on the upper left portion in the screen. Then, among them, the circle mark located at the leftmost position is displayed in red, and the remaining four circle marks are displayed in white. In this way, it is five rounds that can get the ball out, that the current round is the first round in the five rounds, and each circle that can be acquired the ball round advances by ○ The player can be taught to be displayed in red.

  Here, the number of "circles" increases according to the winning symbol. For example, when the winning symbol is the "first winning symbol" or the "second winning symbol", the number of "circles" is "five" but the winning symbol is the "third winning symbol". In this case, the number of "o" is "15".

[5th round]
(C) in FIG. 56: After this, the jackpot game proceeds smoothly, for example, when it is shifted to the fifth round, all five circle marks are displayed in red, for example. In this way, it is possible to teach the player that all rounds capable of winning a ball in the fifth round are finished.

[Demonstration during no round production]
(D) in FIG. 56: Then, when the round (the fifth round) where it is possible to obtain the game is finished, the game no round is started. When the non-rounding game round is started, for example, the non-rounding-round effect of which character information such as "drive mode challenge" is displayed on the screen is executed. By this out-of-ball no-round effect, it is possible to transmit to the player whether to shift to the drive mode or not to shift after the present big hit game.

  (E) in FIG. 57: Then, when the staging non-rounding effect is advanced, for example, character information such as “If you hit the button continuously to drop the heart character, drive mode rush!” Is displayed on the screen The presentation is performed. As a result, it is possible to instruct the player whether or not to enter the drive mode depending on whether or not the movable body 40f falls.

[Button press effect]
In (F) of FIG. 57: For example, an image imitating the effect switching button 45 is displayed on the front, and character information of “continuous hitting !!” is displayed above the effect switching button 45. As a result, the player can be urged to continuously hit the effect switching button 45. Further, when the player presses the effect switching button 45, the effect switching button 45 representing the pressed state is displayed.

[Button depression success production]
(G) in FIG. 57: Then, when the winning symbol in the big hit is a winning symbol to shift to the drive mode (for example, when it corresponds to the “second winning symbol”), the player switches the effect switching button 45 By continuously hitting the button, the button pressing success effect of dropping the movable body 40 f to the front side of the liquid crystal display 42 is executed. In this way, it is possible to teach the player that the game is continuously hit in the effect switching button 45.

  In FIG. 58 (H): In addition, a female character appears, and character information such as "very successful! Congratulations" is displayed. Thus, the player can be instructed to enter the "drive mode".

[Time reduction state rush production]
(I) in FIG. 58: Then, an effect is displayed in which character information such as "Drive mode rush!" Is displayed using the end time (ending time) of the big hit game. Thus, the player can be taught that the "drive mode" is to be started. In addition, character information such as "Please hit right as it is" is displayed together with an arrow indicating the right direction, and it is possible to instruct the player that the game proceeds by hitting the right also in "Drive mode".

  Here, during the ending production, a notification to remind you to forget to remove the prepaid card such as "Please be careful to forget to take the prepaid card" or "prevents attention to the game such as" Let's pay attention to the game " Notification may be performed. In this case, the process may be performed each time an ending effect is generated, or may be performed under a predetermined condition (when it is other than winning during a probability change). Furthermore, each of the effects may be performed simultaneously, or any one may be performed, or the effects may be alternately notified in turn. By doing this, it is possible to easily perform the presentation on the reminder at an appropriate timing, and it is possible to reduce the disadvantage of the player.

[The big hit game end, time shortening state]
In FIG. 58 (J): When the big hit game is over and the internal state (playing state) is set to the time shortening state, the stay mode is set to the “drive mode” and the background image shows the car on which the woman got It is changed to an image representing the situation of traveling on the earth. This enables the player to be taught that the current internal state (playing state) is a time reduction state different from the normal state.

[Demonstration during a short time
As described above, when the game is progressing in the time reduction state, a time reduction effect (advantage game character effect) is performed in which a background image corresponding to the time reduction state (advantage game state) is displayed.

[Right hitting suggestion production]
In the upper part of the screen, a right-handed suggestion effect is executed. In the right-handed suggestion effect, a band-like region is provided at the top of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and right-handed character information and a right-pointing arrow symbol are displayed in the band-like region. Note that such a right hitting suggestion effect is continuously performed when the gaming state is a time shortening state. Then, by executing such an effect, it is possible to urge the player to "right-hand".

[Remaining frequency indication production]
Furthermore, in the lower left of the screen, the remaining number display effect is executed. In the remaining number display effect, a rectangular shaped area is provided at the lower left of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the remaining number of times the game can be progressed in the drive mode is displayed in the rectangular shaped area. In the illustrated example, the "remaining eight times" information is displayed. The number of remaining times is decremented by one each time the second special symbol fluctuates and stops in the time shortened state, and is decremented by one each time the second special symbol fluctuates and stopped in the non-time shortened state. For this reason, the remaining number is not subtracted even if the first special symbol fluctuates and stops in the time shortening state or the non-time shortening state.

[Button press failure production]
In FIG. 59 (K): On the other hand, when the winning symbol in the big hit is not the winning symbol to shift to the drive mode (for example, when it corresponds to the “first winning symbol”), the (F) in FIG. After the button depression effect, a female character appears, and an effect is displayed in which character information such as "Sorry. Next is Ganbaro!" Is displayed. As a result, the player can be taught that the drive mode is not entered.

[Big hit game end, normal condition]
In FIG. 59 (L): When the big hit game is over and the internal state (game state) is set to the normal state, the stay mode is set to the “normal mode” and the background image is changed to an image representing a park. Be done. As a result, the player can be taught that the current internal state (playing state) is a normal state different from the time saving state. Also, a female character appears, and an effect of emitting a line such as "Please return to the left" is executed. In this way, it is possible to teach the player that the game proceeds while returning to the left.

[Demonstration example of drive mode (time reduction state)]
60 to 62 are continuous views showing an example of presentation in the drive mode.

In FIG. 60 (A): In the drive mode, the background image is changed to an image representing a car on which a woman rides travels on the ground. The combination of the pseudo rendering symbols displayed on the middle effective line of the drum unit 200 is the winning eye of "7 symbols of red"-"7 symbols of red"-"7 symbols of red", and the effect of the liquid crystal display 42 The combination of symbol Hz is a winning number of "7"-"7"-"7". This is showing the item at the time of winning. In the upper part of the screen, a right-handed suggestion effect is performed, and such a right-handed suggestion effect is continuously performed when the gaming state is in the time-saving state.
The backlight of the drum unit 200 may be made to emit light in a predetermined color in conjunction with the background image of the liquid crystal.

[Change start of special symbol]
In FIG. 60 (B): At the first hit with the first special symbol, the memory of the first special symbol is often stored, and the memory of the second special symbol is generally not stored. In the illustrated example, four first special symbol memories (markers M1) are stored. Therefore, when the drive mode is entered in such a situation, the first special symbol is variably displayed. When the memory of the first special symbol is not stored, the variation of the second special symbol is first executed by the player executing the right strike. Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the drum unit 200 starts to rotate accordingly, and the fluctuation of the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 and the fourth symbol Z1 also starts. Here, in the internal lottery about the first special symbol, it is assumed that it corresponds to the off.

[Change end of the first special symbol]
(C) in FIG. 60: When the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of disengaging, the pseudo rendering symbol of the drum unit 200, the rendering symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42, and the fourth symbol Z1 of the liquid crystal display 42 are also disconnected. Stop display in the mode of. During this time, the player performs a right strike, a plurality of gaming balls pass the start gate 20, the variable start winning device 28 opens, and four gaming balls enter the right start winning opening 28b. . In this case, four memories (marker M2) of the second special symbol are stored.

  Here, since the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the remaining number is not displayed by subtraction. Specifically, the display of the remaining number remains 8 remaining.

  (D) in FIG. 61: Since the memory of the second special symbol is digested prior to the memory of the first special symbol, the internal lottery is next executed using the memory of the second special symbol. Then, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started, the drum unit 200 starts to rotate accordingly, and the fluctuation of the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 and the fourth symbol Z2 also starts. Here, it is assumed that a small hit is won in the internal lottery for the second special symbol.

[Small hit start, second big winning opening open]
(E) in FIG. 61: and when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the small hit mode, the pseudo rendering symbol of the drum unit 200 ("cherry pattern"-"cherry pattern"-"cherry pattern" combination) The effect pattern Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 (combination of "5"-"2"-"6") and the fourth pattern Z2 (green display color) of the liquid crystal display 42 are also stopped and displayed in a small hitting manner. . Thereby, a small hit game is started, and the second large winning opening 31b is opened. Then, a car on which a female character is riding is speeded up and effects directed to the right of the screen are executed.

  Here, since the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the remaining number is displayed by subtraction. Specifically, the remaining number of times is 7 remaining.

  In FIG. 61 (F): When the small hit game is started, an effect is produced in which the character of the Sennin utters a line saying "Aim for the lower right attacker". As a result, it is possible to inform the player that the second variable winning device 31 has to enter the game ball.

Passing a specific area
(G) in FIG. 62: The second variable winning device 31 shifts to the open state by the small hit game, the gaming ball passes the specific area 31x, and the winning symbol at the small hitting is the fourth winning symbol Do. In this example, a female character riding a car raises a heart mark on which the letter V is drawn, and an effect of emitting a line such as "I did it! BIG BONUS !!" is executed. Thus, the player can be taught that the game ball has passed the specific area 31x and that a big hit game (BIG BONUS) is to be started.

[Small hit end, big hit game start]
In FIG. 62 (H): Thereafter, the small hit game is ended, and the second variable winning device 31 (second large winning opening 31b) is closed. Moreover, a big hit game will be started by the game ball having passed the specific area 31x during the small hit game. In this example, a woman character specific to the jackpot game appears, character information such as "BIG BONUS" is displayed, and an effect is produced in which the woman character emits a similar line. Further, character information such as "Please hit right as it is" is displayed on the display screen along with an arrow indicating the right direction, and it is possible to teach the player that the big hit game will proceed by hitting the right as it is.

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to (B) in FIG. 56, and effects similar to the above during the big hit game are started, and the big hit game proceeds. For example, when the winning symbol at the time of a small hit regarding the second special symbol corresponds to the fourth winning symbol, it is possible to substantially obtain five rounds of winning, and five rounds of winning Later, an effect of entering the drive mode after the button depression effect or the button depression success effect is executed. In addition, when the winning symbol at the time of the small hit regarding the second special symbol corresponds to the fifth winning symbol, it is possible to substantially obtain 10 rounds of baseball, and 10 rounds of baseball Later, an effect of entering the drive mode after the button depression effect or the button depression success effect is executed. Furthermore, when the winning symbol at the time of a small hit regarding the second special symbol corresponds to the sixth winning symbol, it is possible to substantially obtain 15 rounds of winning, and 15 rounds of winning Later (or during acquisition), an effect of entering the drive mode after the button depression effect or the button depression success effect is executed. In addition, when the big hit game is executed in the drive mode, it is decided to shift to the drive mode next time as well, so when winning in the drive mode without executing the button pressing effect or the button pressing success effect You may perform a special role during special effects.

  FIG.63 and FIG.64 is a continuous figure which shows the example of presentation at the time of the 2nd special symbol fluctuating in the drive mode in a non-time shortening state. Such a situation occurs mainly when the memory of the second special symbol is accumulated, although the final change of the time reduction state is a deviation.

  Here, it is assumed that there are four memories of the second special symbol. For this reason, the effect is continuously executed during the hour. Moreover, the information of "remaining 4 times" is displayed as the remaining number display effect. However, the right-handed suggestion has not been implemented.

(During the display of the special symbol)
In FIG. 63 (A): When the variable display of the second special symbol is started in the drive mode in the non-time-shortened state, the drum unit 200 starts to rotate accordingly, and the effect pattern Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 and the first 4 Also start to change about the symbol Z2.

[Continuation of variable display production]
(B) in FIG. 63: The variation display of the second special symbol is continuously executed in the drive mode in the non-time-shortened state. Further, along with that, the rotation of the drum unit 200 is continued, and the fluctuation is continued also for the effect pattern Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 and the fourth pattern Z2. In addition, since the condition here is not a state of time reduction, even if it passes the start gate 20, the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is low. For example, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery in the time saving state is approximately one-half, and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery in the non-time shortening state is 1 / 60,000. For this reason, it is difficult for the variable start winning device 28 to shift to the open state, and basically, it is not possible to store the memory of the second special symbol. Therefore, the drive mode in such a non-time-shortened state is a chance zone in which the second special symbol fluctuates up to four times.

[Stop indication effect]
(C) in FIG. 63: Here, it is assumed that a small hit is won in the internal lottery for the second special symbol. Then, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the small hit mode, the pseudo rendering symbol of the drum unit 200 ("cherry symbol"-"cherry symbol"-"cherry symbol" combination), the effect of the liquid crystal display 42 The symbol Hz (combination of “2”-“2”-“3”) and the fourth symbol Z2 (green display color) of the liquid crystal display 42 are also stopped and displayed in a small hit manner. In this case, an effect is performed in which the character of the animal raises a "mark on which the number 7 is displayed".

  Here, since the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the remaining number is displayed by subtraction. Specifically, the remaining number of times is three remaining.

[Small hit start, second big winning opening open]
In FIG. 64 (D): And, when the small hit game is started, the second large winning opening 31b is opened, and the effect is that the car on which the female character is riding speeds up and moves to the right of the screen. To be executed. At this time, an effect of leaving the animal character is executed.

Passing a specific area
(E) in FIG. 64: The second variable winning device 31 shifts to the open state by the small hit game, the gaming ball passes the specific area 31x, and the winning symbol at the small hitting is the fourth winning symbol Do. In this example, a female character riding a car raises a heart mark on which the letter V is drawn, and an effect of emitting a line such as "I did it! BIG BONUS !!" is executed. Thus, the player can be taught that the game ball has passed the specific area 31x and that a big hit game (BIG BONUS) is to be started.

[Small hit end, big hit game start]
In FIG. 64 (F): Thereafter, the small hit game is ended, and the second variable winning device 31 (second large winning opening 31b) is closed. Moreover, a big hit game will be started by the game ball having passed the specific area 31x during the small hit game. In this example, a woman character specific to the jackpot game appears, character information such as "BIG BONUS" is displayed, and an effect is produced in which the woman character emits a similar line. Further, character information such as "Please hit right as it is" is displayed on the display screen along with an arrow indicating the right direction, and it is possible to teach the player that the big hit game will proceed by hitting the right as it is. Thereafter, the process proceeds to (B) in FIG. 56, and effects similar to the above during the big hit game are started, and the big hit game proceeds.

  FIG. 65 to FIG. 67 are continuous diagrams showing an example of effects performed when the special variation is selected in the drive mode (time shortening state). In the following description, the drum unit 200 is not shown.

In FIG. 65 (A): In the drive mode, the background image is changed to an image representing a car on which a woman rides travels on the ground. At the time of the first hit with the first special symbol, the memory of the first special symbol is often stored, and the memory of the second special symbol is generally not stored.
In the illustrated example, the storage number of the first special symbol is “4”, and the storage number of the second special symbol is “0”.
Although not illustrated in particular, since it is a non-fluctuating time after the end of the big hit game here, the first number cut counter value and the second number cut counter value are respectively set to the initial values "8" and "4" The corresponding first remaining number command subsequent value and the second remaining number command subsequent value are set to “08H” and “04H”, respectively.

[Remaining frequency effect (counter value relationship effect)]
Also, during the drive mode, information corresponding to "the maximum number of remaining changes that can be made to change the special symbol during the drive mode" is displayed as an effect at the lower left of the screen, for example, "eight remaining". There is. The number of times of “remaining ○ times” displayed at this time is controlled based on a first remaining number command transmitted from the main control CPU 72 to the effect control CPU 126. For example, in the example of (A) in FIG. 65, although the subsequent value of the first remaining number command is “04H” internally, a value corresponding to the result of adding “4 (04H)” to this As a result of being selected as the number of times of "remaining ○ times", "remaining 8 times" is displayed on the screen (the same applies thereafter).

[First change]
In FIG. 65 (B): Then, when the first special symbol fluctuates and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of disengaging, the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 and the fourth symbol Z1 of the liquid crystal display 42 Is also displayed stopped in the manner of disengaging. The first change (the first change of the first special symbol) after the end of the jackpot game is a special change pattern corresponding to a part of a plurality of special change states, and a shortening change time is set.
In the illustrated example, the storage number of the first special symbol is "3", and the storage number of the second special symbol is "0".
At this time, "the remaining eight times" is still displayed at the lower left of the screen, and the "number of remaining" is not reduced although the first variation of the first special symbol is finished after the big hit game is over. This is because the second count counter value is decremented at the end of the first fluctuation and the transition is made from “8” to “7”, but the first count counter value remains “4”, so Internally, the first remaining number command subsequent value does not change at "04H", and as a result, the remaining number obtained by adding "4 (04H)" is displayed on the effect.

[The second change]
(C) in FIG. 65: Then, when the first special symbol fluctuates and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of disengaging, the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 and the fourth symbol Z1 of the liquid crystal display 42 Is also displayed stopped in the manner of disengaging. The second change (the second change of the first special symbol) after the end of the jackpot game is a special change pattern corresponding to a part of a plurality of special change states, and a shortening change time is set.
In the example of illustration, the memory | storage number of a 1st special symbol is "2", and the memory | storage number of a 2nd special symbol is "0".
Here too, "the remaining eight times" is still displayed at the lower left of the screen, and the "number of remaining" is not reduced despite the end of the second variation of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit game. This is because, at the end of the second fluctuation, the second number cut counter value is decremented and transitioned from “7” to “6”, but the first number cut counter value remains “4”, and therefore Internally, the first remaining number command subsequent value does not change at "04H", and as a result, the remaining number obtained by adding "4 (04H)" is displayed on the effect.

[The third change]
In FIG. 66 (D): Then, when the first special symbol fluctuates and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of disengaging, the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 and the fourth symbol Z1 of the liquid crystal display 42 Is also displayed stopped in the manner of disengaging. The third change (the third change in the first special symbol) after the end of the jackpot game is a special change pattern corresponding to a part of a plurality of special change states, and a shortening change time is set.
In the illustrated example, the storage number of the first special symbol is “1”, and the storage number of the second special symbol is “0”.
Here too, “the remaining 8 times” is still displayed at the lower left of the screen, and the “number of remainings” has not decreased despite the end of the third variation of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit game . This is because, at the end of the third fluctuation, the second number cut counter value is decremented and transitioned from “6” to “5”, but the first number cut counter value remains “4”, and therefore Internally, the first remaining number command subsequent value does not change at "04H", and as a result, the remaining number obtained by adding "4 (04H)" is displayed on the effect.

[4th change]
(E) in FIG. 66: Then, when the first special symbol fluctuates and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of disengaging, the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 and the fourth symbol Z1 of the liquid crystal display 42 Is also displayed stopped in the manner of disengaging. The fourth change after the end of the big hit game (the fourth change of the first special symbol) is a special change pattern corresponding to a part of a plurality of special change states, and a shortening change time is set.
"Remaining 8 times" is still displayed at the lower left of the screen, and "the remaining number of times" has not decreased despite the end of the fourth variation of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit game. This is because, at the end of the fourth fluctuation, the second number cut counter value is subtracted and transitioned from “5” to “4”, but the first number cut counter value still remains “4”, Therefore, internally, the first remaining number command subsequent value does not change at "04H", and as a result, the remaining number obtained by adding "4 (04H)" continues to be displayed on the effect.

Here, during the fourth change of the first special symbol, the player performs a right strike, a plurality of gaming balls pass through the start gate 20, and the variable start winning device 28 is opened, and four game balls are opened. Is assumed to have entered the right start winning opening 28b. In this case, four memories (marker M2) of the second special symbol are stored.
In the illustrated example, the number of memories of the first special symbol is "0", and the number of memories of the second special symbol is "4".

[Fifth change]
In FIG. 66 (F): Next, when the second special symbol fluctuates and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of disengaging, the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42, the fourth symbol of the liquid crystal display 42 The stop display of the Z2 is also performed in a disappointing manner. The fifth change (the first change of the second special symbol) after the end of the jackpot game is a special change pattern corresponding to a part of a plurality of special change states, and a shortening change time is set.
In the illustrated example, the storage number of the first special symbol is “0”, and the storage number of the second special symbol is “3”.
Here, "the remaining 7 times" is displayed at the lower left of the screen, and the "number of remaining" is decreasing for the first time after the big hit game is over. This is because the second count cut counter value is subtracted at the end of the fifth fluctuation and the transition from "4" to "3" is made, and the first count cut counter value is also decremented to "4" → "3" Because the first remaining number command subsequent value has transitioned to "03H" internally by the transition, "remaining 7 times" is displayed corresponding to the result of adding "4 (04H)" .

  If the player performs a right strike at the fourth change, the flow of the game described above will occur, but if the player performs a left strike at the fourth change, the flow of the game shown below will occur.

[4th change]
In FIG. 66 (E1): When the first special symbol fluctuates and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of disengaging, the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 and the fourth symbol Z1 of the liquid crystal display 42 are also displayed. It is stopped and displayed in the form of out-of-order The fourth change after the end of the big hit game (the fourth change of the first special symbol) is a special change pattern corresponding to a part of a plurality of special change states, and a shortening change time is set.
"Remaining 8 times" is still displayed at the lower left of the screen, and "the remaining number of times" has not decreased despite the end of the fourth variation of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit game. This is because, at the end of the fourth fluctuation, the second number cut counter value is subtracted and transitioned from “5” to “4”, but the first number cut counter value still remains “4”, Therefore, internally, the first remaining number command subsequent value does not change at "04H", and as a result, the remaining number obtained by adding "4 (04H)" continues to be displayed on the effect.

Here, during the fourth change of the first special symbol, it is assumed that the player executes a left strike and one gaming ball enters the middle start winning opening 26. In this case, one memory (marker M1) of the first special symbol is stored.
In the illustrated example, the storage number of the first special symbol is “1”, and the storage number of the second special symbol is “0”.

[Fifth change]
In FIG. 66 (E2): In this case, the variable display of the first special symbol starts. The fifth variation (fifth variation of the first special symbol) after the end of the big hit game is a special variation pattern corresponding to a part of a plurality of special variation states, and the first symbol extension variation time is set.
In the illustrated example, the storage number of the first special symbol is “0”, and the storage number of the second special symbol is “0”.
At this time, "7 times remaining" is displayed at the lower left of the screen, and the "number of remaining times" decreases for the first time after the big hit game is over. This is because, at the end of the fifth fluctuation, the second number cut counter value is decremented and transition is made from “4” to “3”, and the first number cut counter value is not decremented but remains “4” As shown in the generation examples 1 and 2 corresponding to the transition examples 1 and 2 described above, in this case, since the first remaining number command subsequent value is generated using the second number cut counter value, internally The first remaining number command subsequent value transitions to “03H”, and “the remaining seven times” is displayed corresponding to the result of adding “4 (04H)”.

In addition, when the first symbol extension fluctuation time is set, a right-handed emphasis effect is performed on the liquid crystal screen. The right strike emphasizing effect is an effect in which the character of the Sennin utters a line saying, "Don't hit right!"
In addition, the special variation pattern corresponding to a part of a plurality of special variation states is selected similarly for the sixth to eighth variation (the sixth to eighth variation of the first special symbol) after the end of the big hit game, 1 symbol extension fluctuation time is set, right hitting suggestion production is executed.

  Alternatively, in the present embodiment, control can also be performed by transition of the first remaining number command subsequent value as a trigger for executing the right-handed emphasis effect. For example, as a result of the first special symbol fluctuating in the fifth variation as in this time and the second number cut counter value being subtracted, the first remaining number command subsequent value is internally "04H" → "last" If it decreases to “03H”, it is considered that the remaining number of times the second special symbol can be changed is eroded under the influence of the change of the first special symbol this time, so right-handed emphasis production (right-handed Warning) will be performed. The contents of processing of the internal remaining number command subsequent value will be omitted.

[Sixth fluctuation]
(G) in FIG. 67: Next to (F) in FIG. 66, next, when the second special symbol fluctuates and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of disengaging, the effect symbol of the liquid crystal display 42 With regard to the Hz, the fourth symbol Z2 of the liquid crystal display 42 is also stopped and displayed in the form of detachment. The sixth variation (the second variation of the second special symbol) after the end of the big hit game is a special variation pattern corresponding to a part of a plurality of special variation states, and a shortening variation time is set.
In the illustrated example, the storage number of the first special symbol is “0”, and the storage number of the second special symbol is “2”.
At this time, "6 remaining" is displayed at the lower left of the screen, and "the number of remaining" is decreased from the previous time. This is because the second count counter value is decremented at the end of the sixth fluctuation and the transition from “3” to “2” is made, and the first count counter value is also decremented to “3” → “2” Because the first remaining number command subsequent value has transitioned to "02H" internally by the transition, "remaining 6 times" is displayed corresponding to the result of adding "4 (04H)" .

[Seventh fluctuation]
In FIG. 67 (H): Next, when the second special symbol fluctuates and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of disengaging, the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 and the fourth symbol of the liquid crystal display 42 The stop display of the Z2 is also performed in a disappointing manner. The seventh change (the third change of the second special symbol) after the end of the jackpot game is a special change pattern corresponding to a part of a plurality of special change states, and a shortening change time is set.
In the example of illustration, the memory | storage number of a 1st special symbol is "0", and the memory | storage number of a 2nd special symbol is "1".
At this time, "Remaining 5 times" is displayed at the lower left of the screen, and "Remaining frequency" is further reduced from the previous time. This is because, at the end of the seventh fluctuation, the second count counter value is decremented and transitioned from "2" to "1", and the first count counter value is also decremented to "2" → "1". A transition occurs, and the first remaining number command subsequent value transits internally to "01H", so "5 times remaining" is displayed corresponding to the result of adding "4 (04H)". .

[8th start of fluctuation]
In FIG. 67 (I): Next, the variable display of the second special symbol starts. The eighth change (the change of the fourth special symbol) after the end of the jackpot game is a special change pattern corresponding to a part of a plurality of special change states, and the second pattern extension change time is set.
In the illustrated example, the storage number of the first special symbol is “0”, and the storage number of the second special symbol is “0”.

  At this time, “the remaining 5 times” is displayed at the lower left of the screen, but the first number cut counter value after the update that is subtracted at the end of the previous (seventh) fluctuation is “1”. Since the corresponding first remaining number command subsequent value is “01H”, the fact that the present (eighth) fluctuation has been started means that the first number cutting counter value is “1” by the end of the current fluctuation. From the fact that it is subtracted to “0”, it is understood that the fluctuation is a fluctuation that satisfies the termination condition of the time saving state.

  For this reason, in the present embodiment, the right-handed emphasis effect as shown in the figure when the number of operation memories of the second special symbol is “0” although the end condition of the time shortening state is satisfied by the fluctuation end. It is intended to show the player a great deal that it is necessary to display and to increase the number of working memories of the second special symbol (to save the hold). The right strike emphasizing effect illustrated here displays a large arrow pointing rightward on the screen and displays the character information of “right strike” and emphasizes the variable start winning device 28 (right start winning opening 28 b) It becomes the mode which displays the image which In this way, the number of working memories of the second special symbol is increased during the final change that satisfies the termination condition of the time reduction state, and the game in the pseudo time reduction state (actually non-time reduction state) after the end of the time reduction state It is possible to continue the The right strike emphasizing effect may be an effect in which the character of the Sennin utters a line of “right strike!” As shown in FIG. 66 (E2).

[During the 8th fluctuation]
In FIG. 67 (J): There is also an effect of right strike emphasizing effect, the player executes right strike while the second special symbol is fluctuating, and a plurality of game balls pass through the start gate 20, and the variable start winning device It is assumed that 28 open and four game balls enter the right start winning opening 28b. In this case, four memories (marker M2) of the second special symbol are stored.
In the illustrated example, the number of memories of the first special symbol is "0", and the number of memories of the second special symbol is "4".
In this case, an effect of displaying the character information of "OK!" On the screen instead of ending the right-handed emphasis effect is performed (a fulfillment effect executing means). This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the requirement for continuing the game in the pseudo time saving state is satisfied after the end of the time saving state, and gives a certain sense of achievement.

[Example of state transition by special determination time]
FIG. 68 is a diagram showing an example of transition of the gaming state when the special determination time is set at the time of the symbol stop display of the final variation during the time saving.

[When time is short, final change stop (time reduction state end)]
In FIG. 68 (J1): Here, the stop display of the second special symbol is performed at the final fluctuation during the short time. As described above, when the eighth change (the fourth change of the second special symbol) after the end of the big hit game ends, the time shortening state ends with the end of the change time (before the determined time elapses), and no time Transition to the shortened state. Therefore, the band at the top of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 changes from the display of “→→ right strike →→” to the display of the “continuous zone”. However, since the number of memories of the second special symbol stored by right hitting during the hour is “4”, change the second special symbol four times in the non-time shortening state even if the time shortening state is over Can.

[Variable start winning device open]
At this time, as shown on the right side of (J1) in FIG. 68, assuming that the variable start winning device 28 is opened prior to (during variation) at the stop timing of the final variation, the release period is It is possible to enter the ball until (e.g. 0.9 seconds) has elapsed. Therefore, if the settling time elapses before the opening time elapses, the number of working memories of the second special symbol is reduced from four to three by the start of the next change, so during this time the variable start winning device 28 When entering the ball occurs, the second special symbol can be fluctuated more than the maximum number 4 of the working memory number (so-called +1) after the end of the time reduction state, and the game property (big hit continues The balance of the rate etc. collapses.

[During fixed time (non-time shortened state)]
In FIG. 68 (J2): In the present embodiment, when determining the variation pattern of the second special symbol as described above, in the time reduction state, the “first half variation pattern 4” is selected from the variation mode selection offset value “04” As a result, the combination is either “second half fluctuation pattern 10” or “second half fluctuation pattern 11”. Therefore, in the stop display fixed time determination process (FIG. 29), a special fixed time (2.0 seconds) is set as the fixed time.

[Effective time lapse after closing]
Therefore, as shown on the right side of (J2) in FIG. 68, the opening time (0.9 seconds) of the variable start winning device 28 has elapsed or a predetermined number has entered and closed during the special determination time. The effective time after closing (for example, 1.0 second) also surely passes. For this reason, even if entering the ball to the variable start winning device 28 occurs during the determined time after the stop display, the number of working memories of the second special symbol remains unchanged, and after the determined time has elapsed, the variable start is already variable Since the winning device 28 has finished its operation, entering of the variable start winning device 28 will not occur even if the next change is started. As a result, it is possible to prevent the second special symbol from fluctuating up to the number of times of exceeding the maximum number of working memory numbers after the end of the time reduction state, and it is possible to reliably maintain the balance of game play.

  In addition, the change for 4 times of the 2nd special symbol after the time shortening state end (reserved continuation section: consecutive villa zone) is a normal change pattern corresponding to a part of a plurality of special change states, according to the number of memories The fluctuation time is set. Here, the reach variation pattern is selected when the number of memories is "0" in a part of a plurality of special variation states, so reach effect is executed in the final variation of the second special symbol in the non-time shortening state Or, it is possible to execute the display effect of the obtained profit (total ball) obtained in the drive mode.

  Next, the flow of a game (referred to as a “drive mode continuous zone”, a “held continuous section”, etc.) in a pseudo time shortened state after the end of the time shortened state will be described.

[Example example of production in consecutive zone]
FIG. 69 is a continuous diagram showing an example of effect in the connected zone performed in the number of stored workings of the second special symbol after the end of the time reduction state.

[Pending interval 1st change]
(K) in FIG. 69: The first change starts after the end of the time saving state. In this variation, the oldest one of the working memory numbers (four) of the second special symbol stored until the end of the final variation satisfying the termination condition of the time saving state is consumed.

  Unlike the "right-handed" displayed in the time-saving state, the character information of the "Ranso zone" is displayed in the upper part of the screen in the effects in the "Ranso" zone. This corresponds to the fact that since the game control by the main control CPU 72 is already in the non-time-shortened state, it should be returned to the left. However, even if it is in the non-time shortening state, if it wins a small hit within the working memory number of the second special symbol, since there is a possibility that the big hit by the specific area passage, the time shortening in a pseudo manner It is an example of rendering as if the state remains. Therefore, an image substantially similar to that in the drive mode is displayed on the screen, and "the remaining 4 times" is displayed on the lower left of the screen as the number of fluctuations including the present fluctuation.

At this time, the first count cutoff value (CU1) and the second count counter (CU2) have already been updated to “0” at the end of the final change in the time saving state, and therefore, internally The first remaining number command subsequent value and the second remaining number command subsequent value are also “00H”.
However, as described above, “the remaining 4 times” is displayed at the lower left of the screen, and the “number of remainings” continues to decrease when viewed from the final change of the time saving state (“the remaining 5 times”). This is because the second count cut counter value is subtracted at the end of the eighth fluctuation and the transition from “1” to “0” is made, and the first count cut counter value is also decremented to “1” → “0” As a result, since the 1st remaining frequency command subsequent value has transitioned to "00H" internally, "4 remaining times" is displayed corresponding to the result of adding "4 (04H)" to this. It is.
After the end of the time reduction state, the effect control CPU 126 may set a unique counter (simulated short time counter) and take over the remaining number of fluctuations without referring to the first remaining number command.

[Pending second section change]
In FIG. 69 (L): the second fluctuation starts after the end of the time saving state. In this variation, one working memory of the second oldest special symbol is consumed, and the remaining number of memories is two.
At this time, "3 remaining" is displayed at the lower left of the screen, which indicates that the number of remaining displays has decreased from "4 remaining" to "3 remaining" at the end of the previous fluctuation. .

[3rd pending segment change]
(M) in FIG. 69: The third variation starts after the end of the time saving state. In this variation, one working memory of the third oldest second special symbol is consumed, and the remaining number of memories is one.
At this time, "2 remaining" is displayed on the lower left of the screen, which indicates that the number of remaining displays has decreased from "3 remaining" to "2 remaining" at the end of the previous fluctuation.

[Pending fourth interval change (final change)]
In FIG. 69 (N): the fourth variation starts after the end of the time saving state. In this variation, one new working memory of the second special symbol is consumed, and the remaining number of memories is zero. In addition, a pseudo time shortening state is also ended by this fluctuation.
At this time, the character "LAST" is displayed at the lower left of the screen, because the display content has been changed from "Remaining 2 times" to "LAST" at the end of the previous fluctuation.

As described above, the present embodiment has the following advantages.
(1) Regarding the termination condition of the time shortening state after the end of the big hit game, while managing using two types of the first number cut counter and the second number cut counter, the first remaining number command and the second remaining related to these Since the effects are controlled using two types of frequency commands, it is possible to realize various effects using more various commands.

(2) At that time, when transitioning from a value other than “1” to “0”, such as the first number cut counter value “4” → “0”, for example, generated by processing by the main control CPU 72 The first remaining number command subsequent value is converted to realize transition from “01H” to “00H”.

(3) As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an irregular situation in which the effect control CPU 126 that has received a command has to respond to sudden changes in command content, and to achieve smooth effect control processing.

(4) Further, by setting the first remaining number command subsequent value to a converted value, it is possible to make the display in the remaining number direction effect conform to the specification of the game. That is, although the display in the remaining number of times production is "first remaining number command subsequent value + 4", assuming that conversion processing of the first remaining number command subsequent value is not performed, the first remaining number command subsequent value is " Since it changes suddenly from "04H" to "00H", the display in the remaining number of times effect also changes suddenly like "remaining 8 times" → "remaining 4 times".
In this respect, in the present embodiment, conversion processing of the first remaining number command subsequent value is performed midway to prevent the sudden change of the first remaining number command subsequent value, and the display in the remaining number presentation is smoothly performed. It can be changed.

  Next, an example of a control method for realizing the above effects specifically will be described. Fluctuation display production and reach production mentioned above, notice production before reach occurrence, memory number display production, production during major cast, production using liquid crystal display 42 and drum unit 200, production during a short time, right-handed suggestion production, remaining number display production, etc. Are controlled through the following control processing.

[Effect control processing]
FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of effect control processing executed by the effect control CPU 126. This effect control process is executed, for example, in the timer interrupt process (interrupt management process) separately from the reset start (main) process (not shown). The effect control CPU 126 generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined interrupt cycle (e.g., a cycle of several tens of microseconds to a few ms) while executing the reset start process, and executes the timer interrupt process.

  The effect control process includes command reception process (step S400), operation memory effect management process (step S401), effect symbol management process (step S402), time effect during the short time and simulated time short and other effect process (step S402a), drum unit effect management process (Step S403), display output processing (Step S404), lamp driving processing (Step S406), sound driving processing (Step S408), effect random number updating processing (Step S410), and subroutines of other processing (Step S412) It is a structure. Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect control process will be described along each process.

  Step S400: In the command reception process, the effect control CPU 126 receives an effect command transmitted from the main control CPU 72. Also, the effect control CPU 126 analyzes the received commands and stores them in the command buffer area of the RAM 130 according to type. In addition, the command for the effect transmitted from the main control CPU 72, for example, a special drawing destination determination effect command, a (special symbol) operation memory number increase effect command, a (special symbol) operation memory number decrease effect command, start Mouth winning sound control command, demonstration effect command, lottery result command, fluctuation pattern command, fluctuation start command, stop symbol command, symbol stop command, state specification command, round number command, firing position specification command, error notification command, big hit There are an end effect command, a variation pattern destination determination command, a stop display time end command, a remaining number command (first remaining number command, second remaining number command) and the like.

  Step S401: In the action memory effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the above-described stored number display effect or the execution of the advance notice effect using the marker M1. The contents of the operation memory effect management process will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

  Step S402: In the effect symbol management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the variable display effect and the stop display effect using the effect symbol Hz and the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2, or the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable It controls the contents of the effect at the time of opening and closing operation of the winning device 31 or the like. In addition, in this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern of various notice effects (notice effect before reach occurrence, notice effect after reach effect, etc.). As described above, in the effect symbol management process, the effect control CPU 126 displays the effect contents (effect symbol Hz, the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2, the markers M1 and M2, the effect contents on the special effects etc., variously displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, The process of determining the content of the advance presentation effect is executed. The specific content of the process will be described later.

  Step S402a: The effect control CPU 126 executes an effect process of time saving, pseudo time saving, and others. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of determining the contents of the effect on the right-handed suggestion effect and the remaining effect display effect. The specific content of the process will be described later.

  Step S403: In the drum unit effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of controlling the drum unit 200 based on the effect contents determined in the effect symbol management process. As described above, in the drum unit effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of determining the effect content (effect content regarding the pseudo effect pattern, content regarding the movement of the drum unit 200) to be displayed on the drum unit 200. The specific content of the process will be described later.

  Step S404: In the display output process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) basic control information of the effect contents (for example, the number of operation memories for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol , An operation memory effect pattern number, a predictive advance notice effect pattern number, a change effect pattern number, a change time advance effect number, a background pattern number, etc.). Thereby, the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146 and VDP 152) controls the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42 based on the instructed effect content (effect executing means).

  Step S406: In the lamp driving process, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the lamp driving circuit 132. In response to this, the lamp drive circuit 132 drives (turns on or off, blinks, changes in luminance gradation, etc.) various lamps 46 to 52, the panel lamp 53, etc. based on the control signal.

  Step S408: In the next sound drive processing, the effect control CPU 126 sends the sound drive circuit 134 the contents of the effect (for example, the BGM during the transition display effect, the mode transition effect, the big hit effect, voice data, etc.) To direct. Thereby, the sound according to the contents of presentation is output from the speakers 54, 55, and 56.

  Step S410: In the effect random number updating process, the effect control CPU 126 updates various effect random numbers in the counter area of the RAM 130. The effect random numbers include, for example, random numbers used for advance notice selection, random numbers used for normal background change lottery (effect lottery), and the like.

Step S412: In other processes, for example, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the drive IC of the movable body 40f. The movable body 40f operates using the movable body motor 57 as a drive source, and performs effects in synchronization with the display of the image by the liquid crystal display 42 or independently.
In this process, the effect control CPU 126 may perform effect management of the drum unit 200 (a process of controlling the drum unit 200).

  Through the above-described effect control processing, the effect control CPU 126 can control the effects of the pachinko machine 1 in an integrated manner. Next, the contents of the effect symbol management process executed in the effect control process will be described.

[Operational memory effect management process]
FIG. 71 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the operation storage effect management process. The contents will be described below along the procedure example.

  Step S700: First, the effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the effect memory number increase effect command has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the effect memory number increase effect command is stored. When it is confirmed that the effect memory number increase effect command is stored (step S700: Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S702. If the effect memory number increase effect command can not be confirmed (step S700: No), the effect control CPU 126 does not execute step S702.

  Step S702: The effect control CPU 126 executes an operation memory number increase effect selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect that causes the marker M1 corresponding to the first special symbol or the marker M2 corresponding to the second special symbol to be displayed.

  Step S704: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the operation memory number decrease effect command has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the effect memory number reduction effect command is stored. When it is confirmed that the operation memory number decrease effect command is stored (step S704: Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S706. If the effect memory number reduction effect command can not be confirmed (step S704: No), the effect control CPU 126 does not execute step S706.

Step S706: The effect control CPU 126 executes an operation memory number decrease effect selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes an effect of eliminating the marker M1 or the marker M2 corresponding to the lottery element consumed by the internal lottery, and turns the remaining markers M1 and M2 not consumed by the internal lottery leftward. Execute a slide effect.
When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 70).

[Reproduction symbol management processing]
FIG. 72 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of effect design management processing. The effect symbol management process includes execution selection processing (step S500), effect symbol pre-processing (step S502), effect symbol in-progress processing (step S504), effect symbol display-in-progress processing (step S506) and the variable winning device in operation. The configuration includes a subroutine group of processing (step S508). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect symbol management process will be described along each process.

  Step S500: In the execution selection process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S502 to S508). For example, the effect control CPU 126 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the address of the jump destination, and sets the end of the effect symbol management process in the “jump table” as the address of the return destination. Which process to select as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the process performed so far. For example, in the situation where the variable display effect has not been started yet, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol fluctuation pre-processing (step S502) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the effect symbol pre-processing has already been completed, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol in-progress process (step S504) as the next jump destination, and if the effect symbol in-process has been completed, the next As the jump destination of the process of displaying the effect design stop (step S506) is selected. The variable winning device activation process (step S508) is selected as the jump destination only when the main control CPU 72 selects the variable winning device management process (step S5000 in FIG. 16). In this case, steps S502 to S506 are not executed.

  Step S502: In the effect symbol fluctuation pre-processing, the effect control CPU 126 carries out an operation for adjusting the conditions for starting the variable display effect using the effect symbol Hz and the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2. Further, in this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the reach effect according to various conditions (lottery result, type of winning (type of winning symbol), fluctuation pattern, etc.) Select a pre-occurrence alert pattern, a post-reach occurrence alert pattern, etc. In addition, the effect control CPU 126 also controls demonstration effects when the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called wait-for-guest state. The specific contents of the process will be described later using another flowchart.

  Step S504: In the effect symbol variation processing, the effect control CPU 126 generates control information instructing the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) as necessary. For example, when the effect using the effect switching button 45 is performed during execution of the variable display effect, the effect control CPU 126 monitors the presence or absence of the operation of the effect button by the player, and the effect contents (button effect) according to the result The control information of is displayed to the display control CPU 146.

  Step S506: In the effect symbol stop display processing, the effect control CPU 126 controls the content of the stop display effect according to the result of the internal lottery. That is, the effect control CPU 126 instructs the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) to end the variable display effect and execute the stop display effect. In response to this, the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) ends the variation display effect which has been actually executed in the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 and executes the stop display effect. Thereby, the stop display effect is executed substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the special symbol, and the player can be taught (disclosure, notification, notification, etc.) the result of the internal lottery to the effect (pattern effect execution) means).

  Step S508: In the variable winning device activation process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the effect contents during the small hit game or during the big hit. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the in-all-effects effect in accordance with various conditions (for example, winning types). The specific contents of the process will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

[Demonstration symbol change pre-processing]
Next, FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the above-mentioned effect pattern fluctuation pre-processing. Hereinafter, description will be made along the procedure example.

  Step S600: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not a demonstration effect command has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not a command for demonstration effect is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the demonstration effect command is stored (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S602.

Step S602: The effect control CPU 126 executes a demonstration selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects a demonstration effect pattern. The demonstration effect pattern defines the content of the effect indicating that the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called wait-for-customer state.
It should be noted that in the effect indicating the customer waiting state, a content that prevents the game from being embedded may be displayed, such as “Let's pay attention to the game.” By doing this, it is possible to easily perform the prevention of the depression at an appropriate timing, and it is possible to reduce the disadvantage of the player.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the end address of the effect symbol management process. Then, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control processing as it is, and controls the contents of the demonstration effect based on the demonstration effect pattern in the subsequent display output processing (step S404 in FIG. 70) and the lamp drive processing (step S406 in FIG. 70). Do.

  On the other hand, if it is confirmed in step S600 that the demonstration effect command is not saved (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S604.

  Step S604: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current variation is out (non-winning). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is stored (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S612. Conversely, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is not stored (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S606. In addition to the lottery result command, it is also possible to confirm whether or not the current variation is out based on the variation pattern command and the stop symbol command. That is, if the current fluctuation pattern command corresponds to an out-of-order normal fluctuation or an out-of-reach reach fluctuation, it can be determined that the present fluctuation is an out-of-order. Alternatively, if the current stop symbol command designates a non-winning symbol, it can be determined that the current variation is a loss.

  Step S606: If the lottery result command is other than non-winning (unsatisfactory) (step S604: No), the effect control CPU 126 then confirms whether or not the present variation is a big hit. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of big hit is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the big hit is stored (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S610. Conversely, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of big hit is not stored (No), since the remaining is only the lottery result command at the time of small hit, in this case, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S608. In addition, it is also possible to check whether or not the current fluctuation is a big hit based on the fluctuation pattern command or the stop symbol command. That is, if the current variation pattern command corresponds to a big hit variation, it can be determined that the present variation is a big hit. Also, if the current stop symbol command corresponds to a big hit symbol, it can be determined that the current variation is a big hit.

  Step S608: The effect control CPU 126 executes small hit time fluctuation effect pattern selection processing. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. The effect pattern number is prepared in advance corresponding to the change pattern command, and the effect control CPU 126 may select the effect pattern number corresponding to the change pattern command at that time with reference to the effect pattern selection table (not shown). it can. The effect pattern numbers may be prepared as a pair with the variation pattern command, or a plurality of effect pattern numbers may be prepared for one variation pattern command.

  In addition, when the effect pattern number is selected, the effect control CPU 126 refers to the effect table (not shown), and the change schedule (change time) of the effect symbol Hz and the fourth symbol Z1, Z2 corresponding to the change effect pattern number at that time, stop Determine the display mode etc.

For example, the effect control CPU 126 changes the effect symbol Hz and the fourth symbol Z2 in the “drive mode” state when the second special symbol in the time reduction state changes the small hit, and finally the effect corresponding to the small hit A process of selecting an effect pattern for stopping and displaying the symbol Hz and the fourth symbol Z2 is executed.
On the other hand, at the time of the small hitting fluctuation of the second special symbol in the non-time shortening state, the effect control CPU 126, for example, changes the effect pattern Hz and the fourth symbol Z2 in the state of continuing the "drive mode" or in the normal mode. Finally, a process of selecting an effect pattern for stopping and displaying the effect pattern Hz corresponding to the small hit and the fourth pattern Z2 is executed.

  The above procedure corresponds to "small hit", but when it corresponds to big hit, the effect control CPU 126 confirms that "big hit" in step S606 (Yes). In this case, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S610.

  Step S610: The effect control CPU 126 executes a jackpot variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. In the jackpot effect pattern selection process, the process may be further branched according to the jackpot stop symbol.

  In the case of non-winning, the following procedure is executed. That is, when the effect control CPU 126 confirms in step S604 that there is a shift (Yes), next, step S612 is executed.

  Step S612: The effect control CPU 126 executes an off time fluctuation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at the time of disconnection based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. The effect pattern numbers at the time of the departure are classified into, for example, “a normal change in occurrence”, “time-to-day variation”, “a change in reach variation”, etc. Further, “reach change variation” defines a fine reach variation pattern. Note that which effect pattern number is to be selected by the effect control CPU 126 is determined based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control CPU 72.

  When the effect pattern number at the time of losing is selected, the effect control CPU 126 refers to the effect table (not shown), and the change pattern (the change time or reach of the effect symbol Hz and the fourth symbol Z1, Z2 corresponding to the change effect pattern number at that time The presence or absence of occurrence, reach type and reach occurrence timing in the case of reach occurrence) and modes of stop display (for example, "7"-"2"-"4" etc.) are determined. In addition, the effect determination method at the time of such a fall is the same also at the time of big hit.

  When one of the processes in step S608, step S610, and step S612 is executed, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S614.

  Step S614: The effect control CPU 126 executes the advance notice selection process (notice effect execution means). In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the notice effect to be executed during the current variable display effect by lottery. The content of the advance notice effect is determined based on, for example, the result of the internal lottery (winning or not winning) or the current internal state (normal state, time-shortened state). As described above, the notice effect is to notify the player of the possibility that the reach state may occur during the variable display effect, or to warn of the possibility that the game will eventually be a big hit or a small hit. . Therefore, the selection ratio of the notice effect is set low at the non-winning time, but the selection ratio of the notice effect is set higher than that at the non-winning time to increase the player's expectation at the time of winning.

  Step S616: The effect control CPU 126 executes mode effect management processing (advantage game character effect execution means). In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image according to the stay mode. For example, in principle, when the internal state is the non-time shortening state, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image corresponding to the normal mode, and when the internal state is the time shortening state, A process of selecting a background image corresponding to the drive mode (a process of selecting an effect during time saving) is executed.

  However, as an exception, even when the internal state is in the non-time shortening state, the effect control CPU 126 stores the second special symbol when transitioning from the time shortening state to the non-time shortening state. Select a background image corresponding to the drive mode (advantage game character effect execution means, advantageous game character effect continuation execution means). In addition, such an exceptional process is performed in the process during the production | presentation symbol stop display mentioned later.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol management process (end address). As a result, in the subsequent process during the production symbol fluctuation (step S504 in FIG. 72), the fluctuation display effect and the stop display effect are executed based on the actually selected fluctuation effect pattern (symbol effect execution means), A notice effect is performed based on various notice effect patterns. In addition, various stay mode effects are performed based on the background (stay) mode pattern selected here.

[Big win time fluctuation production pattern selection processing]
FIG. 74 is a flowchart of an exemplary procedure of jackpot variation presentation pattern selection processing. Hereinafter, description will be made along the procedure example.

  Step S800: The effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and loads the variation pattern command. This makes it possible to confirm what kind of jackpot fluctuation pattern this fluctuation is.

  Step S802: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the loaded fluctuation pattern is a special fluctuation pattern.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the current fluctuation pattern is the special fluctuation pattern (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S804 and can not confirm that the current fluctuation pattern is the special fluctuation pattern (No) The effect control CPU 126 executes step S806.

  Step S804: The effect control CPU 126 executes an effect selection process per special variation pattern. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern that is a big hit in the drive mode in the time-shortened state.

  Step S806: The effect control CPU 126 executes a reach after hit effect selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern such as a normal reach effect or a super reach effect according to the type of fluctuation pattern (long or short fluctuation time), and in the drive mode in the normal mode or non-time shortening state Select a presentation pattern that will be a big hit.

Then, when the process in step S804 or step S806 is finished, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol fluctuation pre-processing (FIG. 73).
The above processing is processing at the time of big hit, but processing at the time of small hit is also the same.

[Time-of-hour variation effect pattern selection process]
FIG. 75 is a flow chart showing an example of procedure of out-of-time variation effect pattern selection processing. Hereinafter, description will be made along the procedure example.

  Step S820: The effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and loads the variation pattern command. This makes it possible to confirm what kind of out-of-date variation pattern this variation is.

  Step S822: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether the loaded fluctuation pattern is a special fluctuation pattern.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the current fluctuation pattern is the special fluctuation pattern (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S826 and can not confirm that the current fluctuation pattern is the special fluctuation pattern (No) The effect control CPU 126 executes step S824.

  Step S824: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether the loaded fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern after reaching.

  As a result, if it is confirmed that the present fluctuation pattern is the out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S 828 and can not confirm that the present fluctuation pattern is the out-of-reach fluctuation pattern If (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S830.

  Step S826: The effect control CPU 126 executes the special variation pattern deviation effect selection process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern which is to be lost in the drive mode in the time-shortened state.

  Step S828: The effect control CPU 126 executes an off-reach effect selection process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes the reach effect in the drive mode in the normal mode or the non-time-shortened state, and selects an effect pattern to be deviated.

  Step S830: The effect control CPU 126 executes non-reaching effect selection processing. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern that is shifted without performing the reach effect in the drive mode in the normal mode or the non-time-shortened state.

  Then, when the processing in any of step S826, step S828 or step S830 is finished, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol fluctuation pre-processing (FIG. 73).

[Process during production symbol stop indication]
FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing an example of procedure of processing during effect symbol stop display. Hereinafter, description will be made along the procedure example.

  Step S650: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the internal state is in a short time (a state of time reduction). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 can confirm the internal state by accessing the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirming the state designation command. The internal state can also be confirmed by a fluctuation pattern command (the same applies hereinafter).

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is in a short time (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S652, and when it is not possible to confirm that the internal state is in a short time (No), the effect control CPU 126 performs a step Execute S656.

  Step S652: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not it is the time-saving final fluctuation. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms the remaining number command (the first remaining number command, the second remaining number command) to confirm whether or not the time-saving is the final change. can do. For example, if the first remaining number command follow-up value or the second remaining number command subsequent value until the previous time is "01H" and the subsequent value changes to "00H" due to the end of the current change, the current change is Since the first count cut value or the second count count changes from “1” to “0” (which will satisfy the end condition of the time reduction state), the effect control CPU 126 It can be judged that it is a time-final change.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that it is the time saving final change (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S 654, and when it can not confirm the time reducing final change (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S 666 .

Step S654: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of setting the number of stored second special symbols in the simulated short time counter. The simulated short time counter is stored in the RAM 130. For example, when the number of stored second special symbols is "0", "0" is set in the simulated short time counter and the number of stored second special symbols is "1". When it is ",""1" is set to the pseudo short time counter, and when the storage number of the second special symbol is "4", "4" is set to the pseudo short time counter.
After this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S666.

  Step S656: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether the stay background is the normal background, that is, whether the background image displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 is the background image corresponding to the normal mode.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the stay background is the normal background (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S666, and when it can not confirm that the stay background is the normal background (No), the effect control CPU 126 performs the step Execute S658.

  Step S658: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the value of the pseudo short time counter is a value larger than zero.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the value of the pseudo short time counter is a value larger than 0 (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S660, and the value of the pseudo short time counter is a value larger than 0. If it can not be confirmed (No), that is, if the value of the pseudo short time counter is 0, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S664.

  Step S660: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of setting the stay background as the pseudo short time background. The pseudo-time short background is, for example, a background of the drive mode in which the right-handed display is not displayed (pending consecutive section effect in (K) to (N) in FIG. 69).

  By executing such processing, the effect control CPU 126 is able to control the simulated short time counter even when the time reduction state (advantage game state) is ended and the non-time reduction state (predetermined game state) is entered. If the value is greater than 0 (if special conditions are satisfied), it is possible to continuously execute the time-short play effect (advantage game character effect effect) (advantage game character effect continuation execution means) .

  Step S662: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of subtracting one from the pseudo short time counter.

  Step S664: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of setting the stay background as the normal background. The normal background is the background of the normal mode.

  Step S666: The effect control CPU 126 executes other processing. In the other processing, as described above, the effect control CPU 126 controls the content of the stop display effect of the aspect according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the display (“4 remaining, 3 remaining, 2 remaining, LAST, etc.”) in the remaining effects based on the current value of the pseudo short time counter. Do.

  Then, when the above process is finished, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol management process (FIG. 72).

[Process when variable winning device is activated]
FIG. 77 is a flow chart showing a procedure example of the variable winning device activation process. Hereinafter, description will be made along the procedure example.

  Step S800: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the result of the current change is a big hit. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, confirms the lottery result command, and confirms whether it corresponds to the big hit time or the small hit time. As a result of this confirmation, if the result of the current change is a big hit (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S802. On the other hand, if the result of the current change is not a big hit (No), that is, if it is a small hit, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S804.

  Step S802: The effect control CPU 126 executes the jackpot variable winning device activation process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern to be executed between the start of the big hit game and the end of the big hit game.

  Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 sets various image data relating to a big hit effect pattern stored in the image ROM 154 of the effect display control device 144 (VDP 152) in advance as an on-the-spot effect to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42. Execute processing to read according to the winning design.

  Step S804: The effect control CPU 126 executes the small hit variable winning device activation process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern to be executed between the small hit start time and the small hit end time.

  Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern indicating that the small hit game has started at the start of the small hit game (for example, an effect in which a car on which a female character is riding accelerates) and suggests a right-handed If the game ball passes a specific area during a small hit game, the effect pattern when passing a specific area (a female character riding a car raises a heart symbol with the letter V drawn) Execute the process of selecting the effect).

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol management process (FIG. 72).

[Time-time medium and simulated time-time other effect processing]
FIG. 78 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the effect processing during time saving, during pseudo short, and so on. Hereinafter, description will be made along the procedure example.

  Here, the time saving state (time saving) is the time shortening state, and the pseudo time saving (pseudo time shortening) is the state in which the background image in the time saving is displayed in the non time shortening state (in the non time shortening state Drive mode).

  Step S850: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the internal state is in a short time (a state of time reduction). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 can confirm the internal state by accessing the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirming the state designation command.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is in a short time (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S852 and step S854, and when it can not confirm that the internal state is in a short time (No), effect control The CPU 126 executes step S856.

  Step S852: The effect control CPU 126 executes a remaining number display process based on the remaining time reduction number. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, confirms the first remaining number command, and displays an effect pattern in which the value obtained by adding “4 (04H)” to the subsequent value is displayed as the remaining number Execute the process to select. Thereby, during time saving, the value of "remaining eight times to remaining five times" is displayed as the remaining number of times of the display effect of remaining number.

  Step S854: The effect control CPU 126 executes a right-handed suggestion effect selection process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern for displaying an image corresponding to a right-handed suggestion effect at the top of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

  Step S855: The effect control CPU 126 executes a right hit emphasis effect selection process. In this process, when the first symbol extension fluctuation time is set (when the first special symbol fluctuates five times or more in the time shortening state) or when the second symbol extension fluctuation time is set (time shortening It is executed in the case where it is the 4th change when the 2nd special symbol changes 4 times in the state). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern for displaying an image corresponding to a right-handed emphasis effect at the top of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

  Step S856: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the internal state is in the pseudo time-out. If the value of the pseudo short time counter is a value larger than 0, the effect control CPU 126 can determine that the pseudo short is in progress.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is in the simulated time (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S858, and when it is not confirmed that the internal state is in the simulated time (No), the effect control CPU 126 The process returns to the effect control process (FIG. 70).

  Step S858: The effect control CPU 126 executes the remaining number display process based on the pseudo short time counter. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern in which the value of the pseudo short time counter is displayed as the remaining number of times. As a result, during the pseudo-time, a value of "remaining 4 times to LAST (last, may be remaining 1 time, etc.)" is displayed as the remaining number of remaining display effects.

  Then, when the above process is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 70).

[Drum unit production management processing]
FIG. 79 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the drum unit effect management process. Hereinafter, description will be made along the procedure example.

  Step S900: The effect control CPU 126 executes a movable body operation schedule determination process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 operates the operation schedule (variation mode, stop mode, etc.) of the drum unit 200 based on the effect pattern (effect pattern number, etc.) determined by the effect symbol management process (step S402 in FIG. 70). Execute processing to determine

  When the operation schedule is determined, the effect control CPU 126 stores the determined operation schedule in the operation schedule storage buffer of the RAM 130. When the operation schedule is determined, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of turning on the drum unit in operation flag of the RAM 130, and executes a process of turning off the drum unit in operation flag when all the determined schedules are executed. .

  The operation schedule is set for each reel (each movable body). For example, in the case of the left reel 201, "acceleration" → "constant speed" → "deceleration" → "stop" sequentially from the start of fluctuation to the end of fluctuation Content etc. Among these, "acceleration" and "deceleration" have a plurality of speed changes, and "equal speed" may have a plurality of speed changes (for example, "low speed constant speed", "medium speed, etc. "Fast", "High speed constant speed" etc.).

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of speeds (for example, about 100 types of speeds) are prepared for setting the motor (reel), and various setting information (number of motor steps) is stored in a plurality of movable body data tables (not shown). A set speed of the motor, a time required for the operation of the motor, an excitation method of the motor, phase designation information for specifying a phase to be excited of the motor, and the like are stored. Different setting information is stored in each movable body data table.

  Based on the operation schedule of the drum unit (movable unit) 200, the effect control CPU 126 determines which movable object data table is to be referred to in what order and at what timing. The movable body data stored in the movable body data table being referred to is transmitted to the driver (IC) of the drum unit 200 by being stored in a movable body data setting area (not shown). The driver of the drum unit 200 drives each reel based on the movable body data.

  The effect control CPU 126 basically overwrites new movable body data in the movable body data setting area (changes the movable body data table being referred to) when changing the speed of each reel. Even when the speed of each reel is maintained, new movable body data may be overwritten on the movable body data setting area (the movable body data table being referred to is not switched).

  This is because, when maintaining a fixed speed, if a movable object data table of the number according to the number of seconds of variation of the special symbol is prepared, the movable object data table of the number according to the number of seconds of variation of the special symbol This is necessary because the capacity of the movable body data table is increased.

The operation schedule of the drum unit 200 corresponding to the effect pattern is as follows.
For example, when the effect pattern is an effect pattern corresponding to a non-reach out effect, the effect control CPU 126 starts rotation of the left reel 201, the middle reel 202, and the right reel 203 at the start of fluctuation, and the left reel 201 after a predetermined time has elapsed. And the right reel 203 is stopped, and finally the middle reel 202 is stopped. In addition, a stop can be taken as the break which respond | corresponds to the arbitrary stop point and the stop point of production | presentation pattern Hz.

  On the other hand, when the effect pattern is an effect pattern corresponding to reach effect (big hit fluctuation, small hit fluctuation, outlier fluctuation), the effect control CPU 126 starts rotation of the left reel 201, the middle reel 202, and the right reel 203 at the start of fluctuation. Then, the left reel 201 is stopped after a predetermined time elapses, and then the right reel 203 is stopped, a reach state is generated, and finally, the middle reel 202 is stopped. The stop point corresponds to the stop point corresponding to the stop of the production pattern Hz (the winning match of the 7 matches of the same color corresponding to the big hit, the hit hit of the 3 match of the cherry pattern corresponding to the small hit, and the off) Of the middle reel 202).

  In any case, the effect control CPU 126 determines the operation schedule of the drum unit 200 based on the effect pattern determined by the effect symbol management process in the movable body operation schedule determination process, and effects are determined based on the determined operation schedule The contents and order of the movable body data table (deceleration sequence, deceleration sequence with control code added, acceleration sequence, drive start sequence, drive stop sequence, etc.) to be referred to are determined.

  Step S902: The effect control CPU 126 executes movable body data setting start processing. This process is performed only when setting of movable body data is started during execution of an effect, that is, only when overwrite of movable body data occurs.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 overwrites the movable body data of the movable body data table to be referred to next with the movable body data of the movable body data table to be referred to at present, that is, refers to the next A process of storing movable body data stored in a planned movable body data table in a movable body data setting area is executed, or it is determined whether it is the end of movable body data (a movable stage to be referred to next) Execute processing to store the movable body data stored in the movable body data table in the movable body data setting area until it is determined that the body data table exists and the end of the movable body data is determined Execute the process to
When the above process is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 70).

  The present invention can be variously modified and carried out without being limited to the above-described embodiment. The aspect of the effect mentioned in one embodiment is an illustration, and is not limited to the aspect of the effect mentioned above.

In the embodiment described above, although the example in which the present invention is applied to a so-called one type two type mixer is described, the present invention may be applied to a so-called one type game machine (game machine without a specific area).
The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine having a probability variation function, in which case it is also applied to a so-called loop type (type in which a practical upper limit is not set for the number of probability variations). The present invention can also be applied to a game machine of ST type (type in which a practical upper limit is set to the number of probability variations).
Furthermore, the present invention can be applied to a gaming machine having a definite variation area, and can also be applied to a gaming machine having no definite variation area.
Furthermore, the present invention can also be applied to gaming machines that do not employ "simultaneous rotation of the first special symbol and second special symbol", and can also be applied to gaming machines that employ simultaneous rotation. .

  The table configurations (FIGS. 23 to 29) listed in the embodiment are merely examples, and other table configurations may be used. For example, in one embodiment, the “specific first half fluctuation pattern” and the “specific second half fluctuation pattern” are each defined in a table by two patterns, but more than three “specific first half fluctuation patterns” and It is good also as table composition which specified a specific second half change pattern. Even in this case, in the determination of the stop display determination time determination process (FIG. 29), it is only necessary to determine whether or not the “second half change pattern” is the “second half change pattern” for the second half change pattern. Even if this is done, optimization such as reducing the processing load by the main control CPU 72 and reducing the program capacity is possible.

  In the embodiment described above, the example of the gaming machine provided with the drum unit 200 has been described, but a gaming machine without the drum unit 200 may be used.

  In the embodiment described above, an example in which the right-handed emphasis effect is performed using the first symbol extension fluctuation time and the second symbol extension fluctuation time has been described, but such an effect may not be performed, and others You may perform the production of.

  The images listed in the other presentation examples are merely examples, and these can be modified as appropriate. Further, the structure and board surface configuration of the pachinko machine 1 and specific numerical values are preferable examples including those shown in the drawings, and it is needless to say that these can be appropriately modified.

1 pachinko machine 8 game board unit 8a game area 20 starting gate 28 variable start winning device 33 normal symbol display device 33a normal symbol operation memory lamp 34 1st special symbol display device 35 2nd special symbol display device 34a 1st special symbol operation memory Lamp 35a Second special symbol operation memory lamp 38 Game status display device 42 Liquid crystal indicator 45 Effect switching button 70 Main control device 72 Main control CPU
74 ROM
76 RAM
124 production control device 126 production control CPU
200 drum units

Claims (2)

Symbol display means for executing variable display of symbols and stop display;
Variation pattern determination means for determining a variation pattern required for the variation display by combining a plurality of components;
A gaming machine comprising: fixed time determining means for determining a fixed time required for the stop display based on a part of the components of the fluctuation pattern. In the gaming machine according to claim 1,
An element defining unit that defines a plurality of first half variation patterns and a second half variation pattern as the constituent elements;
First half variation pattern table defining means for defining a first half variation pattern table capable of selecting a first half variation pattern from among a plurality of first variation patterns when determining the variation pattern;
A second half variation pattern table defining means for defining a second half variation pattern table enabling selection of a second half variation pattern from among a plurality of second half variation patterns according to a first half variation pattern selected upon determination of the variation pattern;
The fluctuation pattern determination means
When a specific first half variation pattern is selected, and the combination second half variation pattern can be determined and the variation pattern can be determined;
In the case where it is possible to determine the variation pattern by selecting a specific first half variation pattern and selecting a non-specific second variation pattern in combination;
There are cases where it is possible to determine the variation pattern by selecting a non-specific first-half variation pattern and selecting a non-specific second-half variation pattern in combination.
The determined time determining means
A game machine characterized in that the determined time is determined based on whether the combination of the fluctuation patterns has a specific second half fluctuation pattern or a non-specific second half fluctuation pattern.